RECREATIONAL VEHICLE CHASSIS

RECREATIONAL VEHICLE CHASSIS
RECREATIONAL VEHICLE
CHASSIS
Operator’s Manual
STI-425-6
A24-00788-000
Foreword
Introduction
This manual provides information needed to operate
and understand the chassis and its components.
More detailed information is contained in the Owner’s
Warranty Information for North America booklet, and
in the vehicle’s workshop and maintenance manuals.
Freightliner chassis are equipped with various chassis and driver controls. The coverage in this manual
applies to all recreational vehicle chassis in general
and everything may not apply specifically to your vehicle, due to optional component offerings. Component coverage specific to the front-engine diesel
chassis can be found in Chapter 11. If parts on your
chassis differ from those shown, they may have been
installed by the vehicle final-stage manufacturer.
The safety or performance of your vehicle could be
adversely affected by the installation of nonstandard
components. Note the limitations and specifications
provided in the vehicle and chassis manuals, and
consult Freightliner Custom Chassis Corporation before making any alterations to the chassis.
For your reference, keep this manual in the vehicle
at all times.
IMPORTANT: Descriptions and specifications in
this manual were in effect at the time of printing.
Freightliner Custom Chassis Corporation reserves the right to discontinue models and to
change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring obligation.
Descriptions and specifications contained in this
publication provide no warranty, expressed or
implied, and are subject to revisions and editions without notice.
Environmental Concerns and
Recommendations
Whenever you see instructions in this manual to discard materials, you should first attempt to reclaim
and recycle them. To preserve our environment, follow appropriate environmental rules and regulations
when disposing of materials.
Event Data Recorder
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices
that record specific vehicle data. The type and
amount of data recorded varies depending on how
the vehicle is equipped (such as the brand of engine,
if an air bag is installed, or if the vehicle features a
collision avoidance system, etc.).
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record
data in certain crash or near-crash situations, such
as air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for approximately 60 seconds. This data can help provide
a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. Data recorded includes
the following items:
• how various systems in the vehicle were oper-
ating
• engine system information
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator
• if the driver was depressing the brake pedal
• how fast the vehicle was traveling
NOTE: Data is not recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions. Personal data such
as name, gender, age, and crash location are
not recorded. However, other parties such as
law enforcement could combine the EDR data
with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties that have the special equipment, such as law
enforcement, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency
Compliance
This vehicle must be regularly inspected and maintained as indicated in the Recreational Vehicle Chassis Maintenance Manual, and in the Pre- and PostTrip Inspections and Maintenance chapter in this
manual, in order to continue satisfactory performance
and ensure coverage of the vehicle under the manufacturer’s warranty. Many maintenance procedures
STI-425-6 (10/16)
A24-00788-000
Printed in U.S.A.
Foreword
ensure that the vehicle and engine continue to comply with applicable emissions standards. Maintenance procedures, using components engineered to
comply with greenhouse gas emissions and fuel efficiency regulations, may be performed by an authorized Daimler Trucks North America dealer, an independent outlet, or the vehicle owner or operator.
The vehicle owner is responsible for determining the
suitability of replacement components to maintain
compliance with federal and local jurisdictional regulations. Components including, but not limited to, lowrolling resistance tires are specifically designed and
manufactured to exacting standards for regulatory
fuel efficiency and greenhouse gas emissions compliance. It is important that these components are always replaced with components that meet or exceed
the performance of the originally installed components.
1-800-424-9153); go to www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE, Washington, DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety
from www.safercar.gov.
Canadian customers who wish to report a safetyrelated defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free
hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contact Transport
Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD,
Place de Ville Tower C, 330 Sparks Street,
Ottawa, Ontario, Canada K1A 0N5.
For additional road safety information, please visit
the Road Safety website at: www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
Customer Assistance Center
Having trouble finding service? Call the Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-385-4357 or 1-800-FTLHELP. Call night or day, weekdays or weekends, for
dealer referral, vehicle information, or breakdown coordination. Our people are knowledgeable, professional, and committed to keeping your vehicle moving.
Reporting Safety Defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Freightliner Custom Chassis
Corporation.
If the NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Freightliner Custom
Chassis Corporation.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
© 1997–2016 Daimler Trucks North America LLC. All rights reserved. Daimler Trucks North America LLC is a Daimler
company.
No part of this publication, in whole or part, may be translated, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted
in any form by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Daimler Trucks North America LLC. For additional information, please contact Daimler Trucks North
America LLC, Service Systems and Documentation, P.O. Box 3849, Portland OR 97208-3849 U.S.A. or refer to
www.Daimler-TrucksNorthAmerica.comand www.FreightlinerChassis.com.
Contents
Chapter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Page
Introduction, Environmental Concerns and Recommendations,
Event Data Recorder, Emissions and Fuel Efficiency Compliance,
Customer Assistance Center, Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Ametek Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
OptiView Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Driver Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Cleaning and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
In an Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.1
1
Vehicle Identification
Component Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Emissions Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Vehicle Identification
Component Information Label
NOTE: Labels shown in this chapter are examples only. Actual specifications may vary from
vehicle to vehicle.
The component information label lists the manufacturer, month and year of manufacture, vehicle identification number (VIN), gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR), front and rear gross axle weight ratings
(GAWR), and tire and wheel information. It also indicates if the vehicle has been certified as compliant
with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(FMVSS). See Fig. 1.1.
Incomplete chassis intended for service in the U.S.
have an incomplete vehicle certification label attached by the final-stage manufacturer. This label will
be attached to the incomplete vehicle document included with the vehicle, and certifies that the vehicle
conforms to all applicable FMVSS regulations in effect on the date of completion.
Vehicle Identification Number
The chassis vehicle identification number (VIN) is
stamped on a metal plate permanently attached to
the vehicle, and the last six digits (designating the
chassis serial number) are stamped into the metal
frame. See Fig. 1.2. A VIN label is also mounted by
the body builder. Mounting locations vary, to include
the glove box. See Fig. 1.3.
4UZA4FVC0TC748531
GAFFNEY, SOUTH CAROLINA, USA
04/18/2005
f080061a
Fig. 1.2, Vehicle Identification Number, Typical
NOTE: Always include the chassis serial number (last six digits of the VIN) when communicating to Daimler Trucks North America.
Emissions Labels
Aftertreatment System Indicators
Label
09/11/2002
f080123
Fig. 1.1, Component Information Label
The tire and rim portion of the component information
label certifies suitable tire and rim combinations that
can be installed on the vehicle for the given gross
axle weight rating. Tires and rims installed on the
vehicle at the time of manufacture may have a higher
load capacity than that certified by the tire and rim
label. If the tires and rims currently on the vehicle
have a lower load capacity than that shown on the
tire and rim label, then the tires and rims determine
the load limitations on each of the axles.
1.1
Engines and vehicles manufactured after December
31, 2006 and domiciled in the U.S. or Canada are
required to meet all EPA regulations effective as of
the vehicle build date, and are equipped with an
emission aftertreatment system (ATS). Vehicles domiciled outside of the U.S. and Canada may not
have aftertreatment equipment, depending upon local
statutory emissions guidelines. See Table 1.1.
A reference label included with the driver’s documentation package contains important warning indicators
in the instrument cluster that pertain to the ATS. See
Fig. 1.4.
It is a violation of U.S. federal law to alter exhaust
plumbing, ATS, or other components in any way that
would bring the engine/vehicle out of compliance with
Vehicle Identification
12/04/2001
f080122
Fig. 1.3, Vehicle Identification Number Label, Typical
EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM INFORMATION
INDICATOR
LAMP(S)
CHECK
(Solid)
Level 1
(Flashing)
Level 2
STOP
WARNING
(Flashing)
Level 3
Level 4
Indicator Lamp
Message(s)
Filter Regeneration
Recommended.
Filter
Regeneration
Necessary
Parked Regeneration
Required − Engine
Derate
Service Regeneration Required.
Engine Derate To Idle Only.
Diesel Particulate
Filter Condition
Filter is reaching
capacity.
Filter is now
reaching maximum
capacity.
Switch.
Filter has reached
maximum capacity.
Filter has exceeded maximum
capacity.
Required Action
Bring vehicle to
highway speeds to
allow for an
Automatic
Regeneration or
perform a Parked
Regeneration.
To avoid engine
derate, bring vehicle
to highway speeds
to allow for an
Automatic
Regeneration, or
perform a Parked
Regeneration as
soon as possible.
Vehicle must be
parked, and a Parked
Regeneration must
be performed.
Engine will begin
derate.
Vehicle must be parked, and a
Service Regeneration must be
performed. Check engine
operator’s manual for details.
Engine will shut down.
HEST (High Exhaust
System Temperature)
Flashing
A regeneration is in
progress.
Solid
Exhaust components
and exhaust gas are at
high temperature. When
stationary, keep away
from people and
flammable materials or
vapors.
For a driver performed Parked Regeneration, vehicle must be equipped with a dash mounted Regeneration Switch.
02/20/2009
f080156
Fig. 1.4, ATS Indicators
certification requirements [Ref: 42 U.S.C. S7522(a)
(3)]. It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the
vehicle so that it conforms to EPA regulations.
Vehicle Emission Control Information
Label
Model year 2013 and later vehicles meet additional
requirements as specified by federal greenhouse gas
1.2
Vehicle Identification
regulations.
and fuel efficiency regulations (GHG14). Model year
2017 and later vehicles meet similar requirements as
specified by GHG17 requirements. These vehicles
are equipped with components that increase fuel efficiency and reduce GHG emissions. Components
may include, but are not limited to, low-rolling resistance tires.
A Vehicle Emission Control Information Label indicates compliance with GHG14 regulations. See
Fig. 1.5. It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle so that it conforms to EPA and NHTSA
03/02/2012
f080183
Fig. 1.5, Vehicle Emission Control Information Label
Applicable Emissions System Based on Build Date and EPA Regulations
Build Date
Regulation: Emissions Components
EPA07 (reduce nitrogen oxides (NOx) emissions to 1.1 g/bhp-hr, and reduce
January 1, 2007–December 31,
particulate matter emissions to 0.01 g/bhp-hr): Aftertreatment device (ATD) containing
2009
a diesel particulate filter that traps soot and ash.*
EPA10 (reduce NOx emissions to 0.2 g/bhp-hr): EPA07-type ATD, with additional
January 1, 2010–December 31,
selective catalyst reduction (SCR) technology that utilizes diesel exhaust fluid (DEF)
2012
to convert NOx to nitrogen and water vapor.
GHG14: Aerodynamic and fuel efficiency components including, but not limited to,
From March 5, 2012–December
tires, cab/sleeper side extenders, chassis fairings, bumper, hood, vehicle speed
31, 2015
limiters, and idle reduction timers specifically designed to meet regulatory fuel
efficiency and greenhouse gas emissions standards.
GHG17: GHG14 components plus OBD16 instrumentation and sensor upgrades, and
From January 1, 2016
component technology that meets NHTSA and EPA 2017 fuel efficiency and
greenhouse gas emission standards (GHG17) requirements.
* Cummins, Detroit, and Mercedes-Benz ATD’s are also equipped with a diesel oxidation catalyst to break down pollutants.
Table 1.1, Applicable Emissions System Based on Build Date and EPA Regulations
1.3
2
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU)
Instrument Panel
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU)
Instrument Panel
The lightbar control unit (LBCU) instrument cluster is
a full-featured, individual-gauge cluster with an intelligent lightbar (ILB). The individual gauges have light
emitting diode (LED) backlighting. The lightbar control unit receives inputs for the gauges. See Fig. 2.1
for a typical instrument gauge panel, and see
Fig. 2.2 for the LBCU message center warning lights.
See Chapter 5 for detailed warning lamp descriptions.
IMPORTANT: The LBCU is capable of determining when input information is lost. The loss of
input data will be noticeable to the operator by
movement of the gauge to zero. The odometer
value will not be driven to zero if total loss of
vehicle distance data occurs. When data input is
lost, hyphens (-) will replace the digits in the
data field on the display screen.
NOTE: When the ignition is turned on, all of the
indicator lights will illuminate for approximately
three seconds to allow the operator to perform a
bulb check.
IMPORTANT: If the warning system does not
activate when the ignition switch is in the ON
position, repair the system to provide proper
warning protection.
Audible Alarms
During start-up, the LBCU will perform a self-test and
an audible alarm will sound until the self-test is completed. If any faults are found during the self-test,
ERROR will appear on the display screen. Acknowledge any alarms before proceeding to the pretrip
checklist. The alarm will also sound if any of the following conditions occur:
sion is not in neutral.
• The transmission is in neutral or the ignition is
off, and the parking brake is not set and the
service brake is not depressed.
• The turn indicator is active.
• Anytime the ignition is turned off when the
panel lamps are still illuminated.
Emergency Shutdown
The LBCU will shut down if the voltage supply is not
within the normal operating range of 9 to 16 volts for
more than 10 milliseconds (msec). During emergency
shutdown, the gauge pointers will freeze, the display
will go blank, and the lamps will turn off. When the
power is restored to within the normal operating
range following an emergency shutdown, the needles
will resynchronize to zero, and the self-test will be
performed before resuming normal operation.
Information Center
The LBCU is an interactive graphical display that is
capable of displaying text messages and graphics to
communicate real-time information about the status
and performance of the vehicle to the operator. This
information is organized in a menu-structured format.
Power Initialization
When the ignition is turned on, the information center
will illuminate with the Freightliner Custom Chassis
logo. If there are no alarms detected from the selftest, the driver checklist is displayed.
Navigating the Menu Screen
Navigate the menu structure using the toggle switch,
located in the driver’s area. The "up" arrow of the
toggle switch is yellow. See Fig. 2.3.
• Air pressure falls below 65 psi (448 kPa).
Menu Structure
• Anytime the low air warning light is activated.
The menu structure is organized around three menu
screens: the ignition off screen, the home screen,
and the setup/maintenance/diagnostics screen. Each
of these screens contains lists of the sub-menu
screens that may be accessed by highlighting the
desired sub-menu and clicking the right arrow on the
toggle switch.
On the air system, the low air light/audible
alarm will normally come on when the engine
is first started, but will go off when the air pressure in the air tanks reaches approximately 65
to 76 psi (448 to 524 kPa). The parking brake
will not disengage until the air pressure has
reached 65 psi (448 kPa).
• Emergency engine shutdown is activated.
2.1
• The parking brake is applied and the transmis-
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel
1
ABS
STOP
CHECK
45
35
2
25
60
80
40
15
15
25
10
RPM
5
100
75
50
140
85
0
H
0
C
PSI
35
0
RA
U LT
W
LO
LF
SU
13
U
D
IE
SE
L
5
8
E
1
150 PSI
18
F
R
120
0
5
30
x100
9
65
100
20
20
10
55
FU
EL
ON
LY
PSI
150
100
65
100
65
6
0
0
7
4
3
2
8
09/23/2009
1.
2.
3.
4.
f611060
Lightbar Control Unit
Tachometer
Fuel Gauge
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
5. Voltmeter
6. Speedometer
7. Primary Air Gauge
8. Secondary Air Gauge
9. Coolant Temperature Gauge
10. Oil Pressure Gauge
Fig. 2.1, Typical LBCU Instrument Panel, EPA10 and Newer Engines
1
2
4
10
11
5
6
7
8
14
15
16
ABS
STOP
CHECK
9
3
12
13
f611067
09/23/2009
1. Check Engine Warning
2. High Exhaust System
Temperature (HEST) Lamp
3. Stop Engine Warning
4. Dash Driver Display Screen
5. ABS Warning
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Transmission Warning
Engine Brake Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Left-Turn Indicator
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Lamp
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Shift Inhibit Indicator
Headlight High-Beam Indicator
Parking Brake On Warning
Low Air Pressure Warning
Wait to Start Indicator
Right-Turn Indicator
Fig. 2.2, LBCU Message Center/Warning Lights, EPA10 and Newer Engines
2.2
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel
• Maintenance—Includes engine oil, engine air
filter, engine fuel filter, transmission oil, generator oil, generator fuel filter, generator use time.
• Diagnostics—Includes check gauges, check
icons, check inputs, check outputs, engine diagnostics, ABS diagnostics, hardware/software
version, and software debug display (this menu
is used by the gauge manufacturer only).
The following steps are used to make changes within
the setup/maintenance/diagnostics screen.
04/19/2005
f610766
1.
From the Driver’s Favorite Category menu, hold
down the right arrow of the toggle switch for five
seconds to select the setup/maintenance/
diagnostics screen.
2.
Press the down arrow on the toggle switch to
select either setup, maintenance, or diagnostics.
3.
Press the right arrow on the toggle switch to select the sub-category; "Set Time and Date" for
example.
4.
Use the left/right arrows on the toggle switch to
change the information, and the up/down arrows
to move within the sub-category.
5.
Once all changes have been made, hold down
the right arrow on the toggle switch.
Fig. 2.3, Toggle Switch
Ignition Off Screen
When the ignition is OFF and the headlights are ON,
the odometer is displayed. When the ignition is OFF
and the generator is ON, the generator hours are
displayed (if connected by the body builder).
Home Screen
NOTE: Alarm messages have priority over other
display screens. If no alarms are present or all
alarms have been acknowledged, the driver
checklist will be displayed.
The following options are found in the menu and
sub-menus of the home screen.
• A pretrip inspection checklist that includes 19
items and 10 driver-entered options. Once
each item has been reviewed, click the right
arrow of the toggle switch to place a check by
the item. Click the left arrow to exit the checklist.
• Driver’s Favorite Categories—There are nine
categories that the driver can select from; three
can be viewed at one time. Select the category
desired by using the up/down toggle switch.
Then, click the right arrow of the toggle switch
for three seconds to access the sub-menus
within each category. Finally, click the left
arrow of the toggle switch to exit.
Setup/Maintenance/Diagnostics Screen
The setup/maintenance/diagnostics screen is actually
three different categories for the driver to use. They
are as follows:
• Setup—Includes set time and date, configure
checklist, select metric/English, set LCD properties.
2.3
Menu Structure
The menu structure road map is provided to illustrate
the screens that are available in the information center and the path to specific screens. Refer to the
road maps to set the time and date, view engine diagnostics, etc. See Fig. 2.4, Fig. 2.5, Fig. 2.6,
Fig. 2.7, Fig. 2.8, Fig. 2.9, Fig. 2.10, Fig. 2.11,
Fig. 2.12, Fig. 2.13, Fig. 2.14, Fig. 2.15, Fig. 2.16,
Fig. 2.17, Fig. 2.18, Fig. 2.19, Fig. 2.20, Fig. 2.21,
Fig. 2.22, and Fig. 2.23.
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel
Use
to return to
previous step
Reset value options only
applicable to today dis, leg dist,
trip dist
Press
Press
Checklist Menu
Pre−Trip Checklist
Jacks/Air Leveler Up
Check Tow Vehicle
Check an
option
Press
Press
Skip checklist
menu
01/01/00
ODO
TODAY DIST
No
2:34:28
14.4 mi
14. 4.mi
Hold
Press
Press
5 sec
Set up maintenance
and diagnose
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Hold
5 sec
Favorite Display
Press
Reset value
TODAY STARTED 0:00:00
1/01/2000
RESTART?
YES HOLD 3sec, NO
Change format/Information
JAN. 1
ODO
TODAY DIST
2:37:14
14.4 mi
14. 4.mi
09/26/2006
Yes
Format Options
Gen hrs
Date & time (mo/day/yr hr:min:sec;
month. Day hr:min:sed; hr:min:se)
Odometer
Today: dist; time; fuel, fuel econ,
AVSPD, idle time
Leg: dist; time; fuel,fuel econ,AVSPD,
idle time
Trip: dist; time; fuel, fuel econ, AVSPD,
idle time
Road SPD; eng RPM; oil press; inst
fuel econ; fuel used; eng hrs; eng
temp; trbo press; volt)
f040717
Fig. 2.4, Favorite Display, LBCU Panel
2.4
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel
Favorite Display & Park Brake set
Headlights "ON"
Headlights
On
Off
Ignition
On
Off
01/01/00
ODO
TODAY DIST
2:34:28
14.4 mi
14. 4.mi
Park Brake
Set
Release
Hold
3 sec
View while headlights ON
ODO
Set up, Maintenance
and Diagnostics
14.4 mi
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Headlights
"OFF"
Press
Headlights
On
Off
Press
to exit
10/18/2005
f040718
SET TIME AND DATE
CONFIGURE CHECKLIST
SELECT METRIC/ENGLISH
SET MISCELLANEOUS
SET DISPLAY PROPERTIES
Fig. 2.5, View Odometer Value, LBCU Panel
Use
to return to
previous step
Generator "ON"
Generator
On
Off
Set up Menu
Ignition
On
Off
02/06/2012
f040720
Fig. 2.7, Set Up Menu, LBCU Panel
Shows Generator hours
GEN HRS
0.0
Generator
"OFF"
Generator
On
Off
10/18/2005
f040719
Fig. 2.6, View Generator Hours, LBCU Panel
2.5
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel
Month (1−12)
02/01/00
Exit with
Exit with
Favorite Display & Park Brake set
01/01/00
ODO
TODAY DIST
2:34:28
14.4 mi
14. 4.mi
4:55 24
to Save
to Cancel
Park Brake
Set
Release
Press
Day (1−31)
Hold
02/01/00
01
Exit with
Exit with
5 sec
Use
to return to
previous step
Press
to change
4:55 24
to Save
to Cancel
Set up, Maintenance
and Diagnostics
Press
to change
Press
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Year (00−99)
01/01/00
00
Exit with
Exit with
Press
4:55 24
to Save
to Cancel
Press
to change
Press
Set up Menu
Hr (0−23)
SET TIME AND DATE
CONFIGURE CHECKLIST
SELECT METRIC/ENGLISH
01/01/00
Exit with
Exit with
44:55 24
to Save
to Cancel
Press
Press
Min (0−59)
Set Time and Date
01/01/00
Exit with
Exit with
01/01/00
Exit with
Exit with
4:55 24
to Save
to Cancel
To save, the cursor must be all
the way to the right
4:55
55 24
to Save
to Cancel
Press
to change
Press
Press
Format (AM/PM/24)
to save
To exit, the cursor must be all
the way to the left
Press
to change
Press
Must be left
01/01/00
Exit with
Exit with
4:55 24
to Save
to Cancel
Press
to change
to cancel
f040721
09/26/2006
Fig. 2.8, Set Time and Date, LBCU Panel
2.6
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel
Use
to return to
previous step
Favorite Display & Park Brake set
01/01/00
ODO
TODAY DIST
Park Brake
Set
Release
2:34:28
14.4 mi
14.4.mi
Hold
Select Items to be displayed in the
checklist menu
5 sec
Set up, Maintenance
and Diagnostics
Jacks/Air Leveler Up
Check Tow Vehicle
Tire Pressure
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
To add up to 10
different and
personalized items
at the end of the list
Press
19 times
Press to
select
Press
Look for empty lines
or remove
Set up Menu
SET TIME AND DATE
CONFIGURE CHECKLIST
SELECT METRIC/ENGLISH
Press
for next item
Hold
5 sec
Press
Press
Configure Checklist
Type personal option,
characters will appear in
this order: . / 0−9 : ; < = > ?
a−z !
@ A−Z \
"#$%&’() +,−
Press
to save
SET TIME AND DATE
CONFIGURE CHECKLIST
SELECT METRIC/ENGLISH
As many times
as needed
Press
Press
to change
to save
f040722
09/27/2006
Fig. 2.9, Configure Checklist, LBCU Panel
2.7
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel
Favorite Display & Park Brake set
01/01/00
ODO
TODAY DIST
Factory settings cannot be
changed; they will always be
25% for Hdlghts Off and On
Park Brake
Set
Release
2:34:28
14.4 mi
14.4.mi
Hold
5 sec
Set up, Maintenance
and Diagnostics
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Press
Factory Settings
Factory Settings
Dimm w Hdghts Off
Dimm w Hdghts On
Use
to return to
previous step
Press
Yes
25%
25%
to
change
Press
Dimm w
hdlghts on
Press
Press
Press
to save &
exit
to
change
Dimm w
hdlghts off
Press
Set up Menu
SET TIME AND DATE
CONFIGURE CHECKLIST
SELECT METRIC/ENGLISH
Increments of 5%
from 0% to 95%
Press
3 times
Set Display Properties line
SELECT METRIC/ENGLISH
SET MISCELLANEOUS
SET DISPLAY PROPERTIES
09/26/2006
f040725
Fig. 2.10, Set Display Properties, LBCU Panel
2.8
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel
Favorite Display & Park Brake set
01/01/00
ODO
TODAY DIST
Use
to return to
previous step
Park Brake
Set
Release
2:34:28
14.4 mi
14.4.mi
Press
Hold
ENGINE OIL
0 mi
SERV OVERDUE
VERIFY SERVICE DONE
5 sec
Set up, Maintenance
and Diagnostics
Press
Press
Press
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
SET SERVICE INTERVAL
0 mi
EVERY
CHANGE WITH
Press
VERIFY ENGINE OIL
SERVICE DONE
YES HOLD 3 sec, NO
Maintenance
Press
to change
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Hold
Press
5 sec
Press
Press
to save
ENGINE OIL
ENGINE AIR FILTER
ENGINE FUEL FILTER
03/10/2006
Yes
This procedure applies for all the
options shown in this menu list
Fig. 2.11, Maintenance Menu, LBCU Panel
2.9
No
f040726
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel
Favorite Display & Park Brake set
01/01/00
ODO
TODAY DIST
Park Brake
Set
Release
2:34:28
14.4 mi
14.4.mi
Favorite Display & Park Brake set
Use
to return to
previous step
01/01/00
ODO
TODAY DIST
Hold
5 sec
Set up, Maintenance
and Diagnostics
Park Brake
Set
Release
2:34:28
14.4 mi
14.4.mi
Hold
Select English/Metric Units
5 sec
English
Change with
Exit and save with
Set up, Maintenance
and Diagnostics
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Press
Press
Use
to return to
previous step
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Press
twice
to
change
Set up Menu
Diagnostics menu
SET TIME AND DATE
CONFIGURE CHECKLIST
SELECT METRIC/ENGLISH
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Press
twice
Press
Press
to save
Select Metric/English
SET TIME AND DATE
CONFIGURE CHECKLIST
SELECT METRIC/ENGLISH
CHECK GAUGES
CHECK ICONS
CHECK INPUTS
Press
02/06/2012
02/06/2012
f040723
f040727
Fig. 2.13, Diagnostics Menu, LBCU Panel
Fig. 2.12, Change Units, LBCU Panel
2.10
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel
Favorite Display & Park Brake set
01/01/00
ODO
TODAY DIST
Use
to return to
previous step
Park Brake
Set
Release
2:34:28
14.4 mi
14.4.mi
Hold
Press
Speed
RPM
Fuel Level
Air 1
Air 2
Trans Oil Temp
Battery Voltage
Ammeter
Turbo Boost
Appl Air
Susp Air
Eng Coolant
Eng Oil Press
5 sec
Set up, Maintenance
and Diagnostics
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Press
twice
Diagnostics menu
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
50%
50%
50%
50%
50%
50%
50%
50%
50%
50%
50%
50%
50%
Press
Change values
Press
CHECK GAUGES
CHECK ICONS
CHECK INPUTS
Press
to exit
Speed
RPM
Fuel Level
270%
50%
50%
Possible values
−Speed: 0% (0 mph), 50% (42.5
mph) and 100% (85 mph).
−RPM: 0% (0 rpmx100), 50% (17.5
rpmx100) and 100% (35 rpmx100)
−Fuel level: 0% (empty), 50% (half)
and 100% (full).
−Air 1 and Air 2: 0% (0 psi), 50% (75
psi) and 100% (150 psi).
−Trans oil temp: 0% (125°F), 50%
(237.5°F) and 100% (300°F).
−Battery volt: 0% (8V), 50% (13V) and
100% (18V)
−Turbo boost: 0% (0 psi), 50% (25
psi) and 100% (50 psi).
−Eng coolant: 0% ("C" cold), 50%
(half) and 100% ("H" hot).
−Eng oil press: 0% (0 psi), 50% (50
psi) and 100% (100 psi).
−Ammeter: no gauge shown.
−Application air and suspension air:
no gauges shown.
While changing the values,
gauges should move
f040728
09/27/2006
Fig. 2.14, Check Gauges and Change Values, LBCU Panel
2.11
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel
Favorite Display & Park Brake set
01/01/00
ODO
TODAY DIST
Use
to return to
previous step
Park Brake
Set
Release
2:34:28
14.4 mi
14.4.mi
Press
Hold
1st Upper Left
2nd Upper Left
3rd Upper Left
5 sec
Set up, Maintenance
and Diagnostics
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Press
Press
Press
twice
Turn On and Off
1st Upper Left
2nd Upper Left
3rd Upper Left
Diagnostics menu
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
On
Off
Off
Press
Press
To select
next option
Press
Press
CHECK GAUGES
CHECK ICONS
CHECK INPUTS
Off
Off
Off
to exit
Use "Welcome Screen"
to locate icons as they
are being lighted
f040729
03/09/2006
Fig. 2.15, Check Icons and Change Values, LBCU Panel
2.12
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel
Check inputs
Favorite Display & Park Brake set
01/01/00
ODO
TODAY DIST
Park Brake
Set
Release
2:34:28
14.4 mi
14.4.mi
Hold
5 sec
Use
to return to
previous step
Set up, Maintenance
and Diagnostics
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Press
Press
twice
Diagnostics menu
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Press
Press
twice
Press
CHECK GAUGES
CHECK ICONS
CHECK INPUTS
to exit
A04 Generator
L/NC
H
D15 Ignition
H/NC
A03 E Brake 50%
C06 Throttle Dis
L/NC
L/NC
C07 Lift Open
H/NC
B12 Audible Alarm
C05 Park Brake
L
C04 Tag Axle
L/NC
C08 Left Turn
L/NC
D08 Right Turn
L/NC
A05 Brakes Worn
L
C14 Optional 1
L/NC
A06 Optional 2
L/NC
L/NC
A07 Optional 3
L/NC
A08 Optional 4
B01 Optional 5
L/NC
B08 Optional 6
L/NC
L/NC
C11 Optional 7
D04 Optional 8
L/NC
A12 High Beam
L/NC
L/NC
D11 Service Brake
D07 High Idle Req
H/NC
B04 E Brake 100%
H/NC
H/NC
A09 Water In Fuel
B09 Cruise On
L
H/NC
C12 Cruise R/A
H/NC
C01 Cruise S/D
C10 Spare 1
H/NC
D01 Fuel Level
105ohm
C13 Brake Fuse S
14.5V
D12 Pneum ABS
0.1V
B11 Hydraul ABS
8.4V
D10 Rain Sensr
8.3V
C16 Spare 2
8.7V
D16 Headlamp Pwr
OFF
A01 Panel Light Pwm
0%
D14 Battery
14.3V
f040730
09/26/2006
NOTE: L = Low, H = 12 volt, and NC = not connected.
Fig. 2.16, Check Inputs, LBCU Panel
2.13
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel
Favorite Display & Park Brake set
01/01/00
ODO
TODAY DIST
Park Brake
Set
Release
2:34:28
14.4 mi
14.4.mi
Use
to return to
previous step
Press
Check Outputs
Hold
C2 Strtr Lock Out
C3 Veh Charging
D6 Vehicle Moving
5 sec
Set up, Maintenance
and Diagnostics
Off
Off
Off
Press
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Turn on and Off
Press
twice
C2 Strtr Lock Out
C3 Veh Charging
D6 Vehicle Moving
Diagnostics menu
Press
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Press
On
Off
Off
To select
next option
Press
3 times
Press
CHECK ICONS
CHECK INPUTS
CHECK OUTPUTS
to exit
f040731
03/09/2006
Fig. 2.17, Check Outputs, LBCU Panel
2.14
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel
Favorite Display & Park Brake set
01/01/00
ODO
TODAY DIST
2:34:28
14.4 mi
14.4.mi
Park Brake
Set
Release
Use
to return to
previous step
Favorite Display & Park Brake set
01/01/00
ODO
TODAY DIST
Hold
Use
to return to
previous step
5 sec
− ACTIVE ENG FAULTS
Wait Requesting Faults
from Engine Controller
Set up, Maintenance
and Diagnostics
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
− ACTIVE ABS FAULTS
Wait Requesting Faults
from ABS Controller
Set up, Maintenance
and Diagnostics
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Press
Press
twice
Diagnostics menu
Press
Press
twice
0 ACTIVE ENG FAULTS
0 ACTIVE ABS FAULTS
Diagnostics menu
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Press
Press
4 times
CHECK OUTPUTS
ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS
TRANS DIAGNOSTICS
Press
Press
6 times
Press
to exit
f040732
Fig. 2.18, Engine Diagnostics, LBCU Panel
2.15
Park Brake
Set
Release
Hold
5 sec
02/06/2012
2:34:28
14.4 mi
14.4.mi
ABS DIAGNOSTICS
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE VER
SW DEBUG DISPLAY
Press
to exit
02/06/2012
Fig. 2.19, ABS Diagnostics, LBCU Panel
f040734
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel
Favorite Display & Park Brake set
01/01/00
ODO
TODAY DIST
2:34:28
14.4 mi
14.4.mi
Park Brake
Set
Release
Use
to return to
previous step
Favorite Display & Park Brake set
01/01/00
ODO
TODAY DIST
Hold
Park Brake
Set
Release
Use
to return to
previous step
Hold
5 sec
5 sec
Hardware ver: 0A
Software ver: 1.08
Set up, Maintenance
and Diagnostics
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
0000000000 00000000
Display: F9 00000000
E 00 5 00
Set up, Maintenance
and Diagnostics
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Press
Press
twice
Press
Press
twice
Diagnostics menu
Diagnostics menu
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Press
Press
7 times
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE VER
SW DEBUG DISPLAY
CHECK INTERNAL DATA
02/06/2012
2:34:28
14.4 mi
14.4.mi
Press
Press
to exit
f040735
Fig. 2.20, Hardware/Software Menu, LBCU Panel
Press
8 times
SW DEBUG DISPLAY
CHECK INTERNAL DATA
ODOMETER DIAGNOSTICS
02/06/2012
Press
to exit
f040736
NOTE: This screen is used by the manufacturer only.
Fig. 2.21, Software Debug Display, LBCU Panel
2.16
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU) Instrument Panel
Favorite Display & Park Brake set
01/01/00
ODO
TODAY DIST
2:34:28
14.4 mi
14.4.mi
Park Brake
Set
Release
Use
to return to
previous step
Favorite Display & Park Brake set
01/01/00
ODO
TODAY DIST
Hold
2:34:28
14.4 mi
14.4.mi
Park Brake
Set
Release
Use
to return to
previous step
Hold
5 sec
5 sec
IP ODO
14.4mi
ENG ODO −−−−−−−−−−−
−−−−−−−−−−−−−
DIFF
Set up, Maintenance
and Diagnostics
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Check Input Override
Set up, Maintenance
and Diagnostics
C05 Park Brake
D11 Service Brake
C06 Throttle Dis
D07 High Idle Req
B04 Engine Brk 1
B02 Engine Brk 2
B09 Cruise On
C12 Cruise R/A
C01 Cruise S/D
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Press
Press
twice
Press
twice
Diagnostics menu
Diagnostics menu
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Press
Press
9 times
Press
Press
10 times
Press
CHECK INTERNAL DATA
ODOMETER DIAGNOSTICS
INPUT OVERRIDE
02/06/2012
Press
to exit
f040738
Fig. 2.22, Odometer Diagnostics, LBCU Panel
2.17
CHECK INTERNAL DATA
ODOMETER DIAGNOSTICS
INPUT OVERRIDE
02/06/2012
Press
to exit
f040739
Fig. 2.23, Check Input Override, LBCU Panel
3
Ametek Instrument Panel
Ametek Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Ametek Instrument Panel
Ametek Instrument Panel
Self-Test
The following information describes a typical instrument panel manufactured by Ametek. See Figure 3.1
for a typical instrument gauge panel, and see Figure
3.2 for the Ametek warning lamps. See Chapter 5 for
detailed warning lamp descriptions.
When the ignition is turned on, a required self-test
automatically begins. Gauge needles will reset to
zero during the self-test, and then immediately move
to the position dictated by the data received. During
this time, the warning lights, alarm (buzzer), and
driver display screen will also perform a self-test.
NOTE: These instrument panels are shown with
a standard U.S. speedometer, which shows
miles per hour (mph) more prominently than kilometers per hour (km/h).
Message Display Center
The message display is a graphical, backlit, liquid
crystal display (LCD) that relays information to the
vehicle operator. The messages displayed include:
• Odometer
• Trip Odometer 1/Trip Odometer 2
• Chassis Battery Voltage
• Instantaneous Fuel Rate
• Average Fuel Rate
• Gear Attained Status
• Transmission Temperature
• Hour Meter
• Boost Pressure
• Engine Oil Pressure
• Coolant Temperature
• Fuel Level
• Percent Engine Load
• Engine RPM
During normal operation, the LCD displays the odometer value and chassis battery voltage on the top
line, and driver selected parameters, such as the trip
odometer and fuel rate, on the second and third
lines.
Priority Messages
Priority messages (including warning messages) are
displayed in the LCD due to various inputs or data
messages. Unless noted otherwise, the priority message will take over the whole screen, allowing multiple messages to be displayed in five second intervals.
3.1
NOTE: The driver can activate or deactivate the
start-up self-test by accessing the setup menu.
Menu System
The menu system is shown on the driver display
screen once the self-test is finished. The menu system responds to input from the driver and remains
active as long as the ignition is on. In order for the
driver to operate the menu system, the ignition must
be ON, and the park brake must be set (ON). The
main features of the menu system are described
below.
• Setup—this is used to set various parameters,
which are saved when the ignition is turned off.
Setup has select display units, startup screen,
LCD contrast, and reset parameters.
• Maintenance—shows various maintenance in-
tervals such as engine oil, air filter, etc.
• Diagnostics—this is used for setting and read-
ing inputs and outputs and checking the
gauges. It also shows the hardware and software version of the instrument panel, and has
menus to retrieve active error codes from the
engine, transmission, and ABS controllers.
NOTE: No lines can be highlighted in the menu
system screen. To get to the sections that can
be highlighted, press the right arrow toggle button and hold it for two seconds. The display
screen will change and the options shown can
then be highlighted. Once a selection has been
chosen and changes are made, press the right
arrow toggle button to go back to the main message display screen.
Setup Menu
Select Display Units
The set units screen allows the driver to choose between English or metric units of measurement for the
displayed values. To navigate to the set units screen,
see Fig. 3.3, screens H, I, and J.
Ametek Instrument Panel
1
2
8
3
4
7
5
6
10/13/2009
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fuel Gauge
Speedometer
Coolant Temperature Gauge
Toggle Button, Right
f611051
5.
6.
7.
8.
Toggle Button, Down
Message Display Center
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Fig. 3.1, Typical Instrument Panel, EPA10 and Newer Engines
Startup Screen
Maintenance Menu
The startup screen selection allows the driver to turn
the startup screen on or off.
The maintenance menu has the following three sub
menus:
LCD Contrast
• maintenance intervals
Select contrast from the menu to set the LCD contrast. Use the down toggle button to set the contrast
to the desired level. To navigate to the contrast
screen, see Fig. 3.3, screen M.
• transmission oil life remaining
Reset Parameters
The reset parameters screen is included with vehicles that have the Allison transmission prognostics
feature.
• transmission oil filter life monitor
Maintenance Intervals
The maintenance intervals menu allows the driver to
set the change intervals for engine oil and engine air
filter. If the intervals are set to zero, the maintenance
warnings must be disabled.
3.2
Ametek Instrument Panel
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
2
14
1
16
15
17
18
20
09/21/2009
1. Maintenance Warning
2. Left-Turn Indicator
3. High Exhaust System
Temperature (HEST) Lamp
4. Check Engine Warning
5. Stop Engine Warning
6. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
7. Engine Brake Indicator
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
19
f611052
Wait to Start Indicator
ABS Warning
Shift Inhibit Indicator
Transmission Warning
Stop Transmission (hybrid only)
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Lamp
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Right-Turn Indicator
Fasten Seat Belt Warning
Air Brake Warning
Hydraulic Brake System Warning
Headlight High-Beam Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Parking Brake On Warning
Fig. 3.2, Warning Lamps, EPA10 and Newer Engines
Transmission Oil Life Remaining
• check gauges
If transmission prognostics are enabled, this menu
indicates how much useful oil life remains.
• check indicators (warning lamps)
Transmission Oil Filter Life Monitor
• check binary inputs
If transmission prognostics are enabled, the transmission oil filter life monitor tells the driver if the
transmission oil filter is clogged and in need of repair.
A message will appear on the display screen as
TRANS OIL FILTER FUNCTIONAL or TRANS OIL
FILTER CLOGGED.
• check analog inputs
Diagnostic Menu
The diagnostic menu contains the following items:
• engine faults
• transmission faults
• ABS faults
• check outputs
• odometer diagnostics
3.3
• check LCD
• check datalink
• hardware/software version
All of the items in the diagnostic menu can be accessed by using the toggle buttons and selecting the
auxiliary screens. Then navigate to the diagnostic
sub-menu. Some of the more frequently used diagnostic menus are described further below.
Engine Faults
This screen displays engine fault codes that are received from the engine electronic control unit (ECU).
To navigate to the engine fault screen, see Fig. 3.4,
screen AA.
Ametek Instrument Panel
Transmission Faults
Check Datalink
This screen displays transmission fault codes that
are received from the transmission ECU. To navigate
to the transmission fault screen, see Fig. 3.4, screen
AB.
The check datalink screen allows the driver to view
all devices that communicate on the J1939, J1587,
and GMLAN datalinks. To navigate to the check datalink screen, see Fig. 3.6, screen AL.
ABS Diagnostics
Menu Navigation
This screen displays Antilock Brake System (ABS)
fault codes that are received from the ABS ECU. To
navigate to the ABS diagnostic screen, see Fig. 3.4,
screen AC.
The menu navigation road maps are provided to illustrate the screens that are available in the menu
system. The paths to specific screens are shown,
along with instructions for using the toggle buttons to
move from one screen to another. Refer to the road
maps to change items shown in lines one, two, and
three of the display screen, view the setup screens,
diagnostics, etc. See Fig. 3.3, Fig. 3.4, Fig. 3.5,
Fig. 3.6, Fig. 3.7, Fig. 3.8, Fig. 3.9, Fig. 3.10,
Fig. 3.11, Fig. 3.12, Fig. 3.13, Fig. 3.14, and
Fig. 3.15.
Check Gauges
The check gauges screen allows the driver to set
each gauge as a percentage of scale (either 0, 50, or
100%), as shown in the LCD. To navigate to the
check gauges screen, see Fig. 3.5, AG screens.
Warning Lamp
The warning lamp screen allows the driver to test
each warning lamp (not the vehicle load) on and then
off, displaying the lamp name and status in the LCD.
To navigate to the warning lamp screen, see
Fig. 3.5, screen AH.
Check LCD
Selecting the check LCD screen displays the Freightliner Custom Chassis Corporation (FCCC) logo in
normal and reverse video three times and then returns to the menu. To navigate to the check LCD
screen, see Fig. 3.5, screen AI.
IMPORTANT: Follow the steps below to change
the three items (also known as favorites) shown
in the message display center. The message
display center is referred to as screen C in
Fig. 3.9.
1.
With the vehicle in park, turn the ignition to ON,
and allow the self test to complete.
2.
Press the down toggle button to select an item to
change. The selected item will now be highlighted.
3.
Press the right toggle button once to enter the
favorites display menu, shown in Fig. 3.9, as
screen D.
4.
Use the down toggle button to scroll through the
available items.
5.
Highlight the new item, then press the right
toggle button. The selected item will now appear
in the message display center.
Check Binary Inputs
The check binary inputs screen displays the pin number and status of each binary input. The toggle buttons allow the driver to select each binary input. This
information is continuously updated to assist in
troubleshooting. To navigate to the check binary inputs screen, see Fig. 3.5, screen AJ.
Check Analog Inputs
The check analog inputs screen displays the pin
number and actual value of each analog input defined in the system. The toggle buttons allow the
driver to select each analog input. This information is
continuously updated to assist in troubleshooting. To
navigate to the check analog input screen, see
Fig. 3.6, screen AK.
3.4
Ametek Instrument Panel
SETUP
Right Press
Or
Down Hold
Current Units =
English
Down Press
Down Press
Current Units =
English
Current Units =
Metric
Current Units =
Metric
Right Press
Select Display
Units highlighted
Right Press
Or
Down Hold
Right Press
Or
Down Hold
Startup Screen =
Enabled
Right Press
Startup Screen
highlighted
Startup Screen =
Disabled
Down Press
Down Press
Startup Screen =
Enabled
Startup Screen =
Disabled
Right Press
Down Hold
Or (Right & Exit
Or
Down Hold
highlighted)
Down Press
Highlight next
line of list.
At middle,
wrap to top
Down Press
At Min Contrast /
Set Contrast to Max
Right Press
Right Press
Display Contrast
highlighted
Down Hold
Or
Down Press
Not At Min Contrast /
Decrease Contrast
Right Press
Right Press
Reset Parameters
highlighted
Down Hold
Or
Right Hold
Reset Parameters
Right Press
Or
Down Hold
AUXILIARY
SCREENS
09/23/2009
f040792
Fig. 3.3, Setup Menu Screens
3.5
Ametek Instrument Panel
Diagnostics
Screens AA,AB,AC Format For J1587
Note 5:
Screen Z scrolls to display the
following items:
ENGINE FAULTS
TRANSMISSION FAULTS
ABS FAULTS
CHECK OUTPUTS
CHECK DATA INPUTS
ODOMETER DIAGNOSTICS
CHECK GAUGES
CHECK WARNING LAMPS
CHECK LCD
CHECK BINARY INPUTS
CHECK ANALOG INPUTS
CHECK DATA LINK
VERSION INFORMATION
EXIT
The text DIAGNOSTIC MENU
remains fixed on the first line.
Down Press
Display Next Fault
Right Press
Right Press
Engine Faults
Highlighted
Down Hold
Or
Menu
Down Press
Display Next Fault
Right Press
Right Press
Trans Faults
Highlighted
Down Hold
Or
Menu
Menu
Down Press
Display Next Fault
Right Press
Right Press
ABS Faults
Highlighted
Down Hold
Or
Menu
Down Press
Change to
Next Output
(Right & Exit
highlighted)
Down Press
Highlight next
line of list.
At bottom,
wrap to top
Right Press
Right Press
Check Outputs
Highlighted
Down Hold
Or
Menu
Right Hold
Toggle Output
State Between
Off and On
Screen AE For J1587
Right Press
Odometer Diag
Highlighted
09/23/2009
Right || Hold Down
Menu
f040795
Fig. 3.4, Diagnostic Menu Screens—Screen 1
3.6
Ametek Instrument Panel
Other Text for Screen AG
Down Press
Change to
Next Gauge
Right Press
Check Gauges
Highlighted
Right || Hold Down
Menu
Right || Hold Down
Menu
Right ||
9 Seconds Elapsed
|| Hold Down
Menu
Right || Hold Down
Menu
Right Hold
Step Gauge to
Next Position
Down Press
Change to
Next Telltale
Right Press
Warning Lamps
Highlighted
Right Hold
Toggle State
Between
Off and On
Right Press
Check LCD
Highlighted
Every 1.5 Seconds /
Invert Video of
Displayed Image
Down Press
Change to
Next Input
Right Press
Check Binary Inputs
Highlighted
09/23/2009
f040796
Fig. 3.5, Diagnostic Menu Screens—Screen 2
3.7
Ametek Instrument Panel
Down Press
Change to
Next Input
Right Press
Check Analog Inputs
Highlighted
Screen AK
Input Name
Pin pp of 26
xx.x Units
Right || Hold Down
Menu
Screen AL
ECUs on Data Bus
J1939 SA xx
J1939 SA yy
Right || Hold Down
Menu
Screen AM
SOFTWARE VER: x.yy
CONFIG: ccccccc
HARDWARE VER: z
Right || Hold Down
Menu
Down Press
Scroll Screen
Down 1 Line
Right Press
Check Data Link
Highlighted
Right Press
Version Information
Highlighted
AUXILIARY
SCREENS
02/06/2012
f040797
Fig. 3.6, Diagnostic Menu Screens—Screen 3
3.8
Ametek Instrument Panel
Ignition On or
Headlamps On or
Marker Lamps On or
Park Brake Off
ACTIVE
Ignition Off &
( Headlamps On or
Marker Lamps On or
Park Brake Off )
IGNITION
OFF
Ignition On
Ignition
On
Ignition
Off
IGNITION ON
NORMAL MODE
SELF TEST
H*
Self Test
Enabled
DISPLAY
MESSAGES
AUXILIARY
SCREENS
DOWNLOAD
MODE
Right Hold
H*
No Warnings Active or
All Warnings
Acknowledged
Park Brake On
Active Warning
Messages
USB Drive Present &
Park Brake On &
Vehicle Speed = 0 &
Not in Self Test
WARNING
MESSAGES
Ignition Off &
Headlamps Off &
Marker Lamps Off &
Park Brake On
09/23/2009
f040788
Fig. 3.7, Ignition On—Normal Mode
3.9
Ametek Instrument Panel
SELF TEST
The Self Test screens display the FCCC
logo in normal video (Screen A) and in
reverse video (Screen B)
Startup Screen Enabled
Screen A
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Screen Displayed
for 1.5 Seconds
Startup Screen Disabled
Screen B
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Screen Displayed
for 1.5 Seconds
DISPLAY
MESSAGES
02/06/2012
f040789
Fig. 3.8, Self Test, Ametek Panel
3.10
Ametek Instrument Panel
DISPLAY MESSAGES
Right Hold
Reset Highlighted Item
(if resettable)
Down Hold
Make No Changes
Screen C
Selected Line 1 Data
Selected Line 2 Data
Selected Line 3 Data
Down Press
Highlight CurrentLine
HighlightTimer = 5 sec.
Screen D
Right Press
Highlight First Item in List
Right Press
Down Press
Put Data For Highlighted Item
In Display Line CurrentLine
Move to, and Highlight,
Next Item in List
New Warning
Message Active
WARNING
MESSAGES
11/23/2011
Right Hold
Park Brake On
HighlightTimer = 0
AUXILIARY
SCREENS
f040790
Fig. 3.9, Display Messages
3.11
Favorites Display Menu
Average Fuel Economy
Gear Attained Status
Ametek Instrument Panel
AUXILIARY SCREENS
Right Press
Setup
highlighted
SETUP.
SETUP
Right Press
Maintenance
highlighted
MAINTENANCE
Screen G
SETUP
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
Down Press
Highlight next
line of list.
At middle,
wrap to top
Right Press
Diagnostics
highlighted
DIAGNOSTICS
Down Hold
Right Press
Trip Data
highlighted
TRIP DATA
DISPLAY
MESSAGES
02/06/2012
f040791
Fig. 3.10, Auxiliary Screens
3.12
Ametek Instrument Panel
MAINTENANCE
Maint
Menu
Right Press
Or
Down Hold
(Right & Exit
highlighted)
Down Press
Highlight next
line of list.
At middle,
wrap to top
Oil Change Baseline +
Oil Change Distance >=
Odometer
Right Hold
Oil Change
Baseline =
Odometer
Right Press
Right Press
Oil Change Distance =
Current Displayed
Value
Engine Oil
Highlighted
Right Press
Or
else
Down Hold
Down Press
Right Hold
Oil Change
Distance = 0
Display Next
Value of Oil
Change Distance
Oil Change
Baseline =
Odometer
Right Press
Or
Down Hold
Air Change Baseline +
Air Change Distance >=
Odometer
Right Hold
Air Change
Baseline =
Odometer
Right Press
Right Press
Air Change Distance =
Current Displayed
Value
Engine Air Filter
Highlighted
Right Press
else
Down Press
Display Next
Value of Air
Change Distance
Or
Down Hold
Right Hold
Air Change
Distance = 0
Air Change
Baseline =
Odometer
09/23/2009
f040793
Fig. 3.11, Maintenance Menu Screens—Screen 1
3.13
Ametek Instrument Panel
Right Press
Right Press
Transmission
Oil Life
Highlighted
Or
Down Hold
Right Hold
Send SPN 1584 = 37
Right Press
Or
Down Hold
Right Press
Right Press
Transmission
Oil Filter
Highlighted
Or
Down Hold
Maint
Menu
Right Hold
Send SPN 1584 = 39
Right Press
Or
Down Hold
AUXILIARY
SCREENS
02/06/2012
f040794
Fig. 3.12, Maintenance Menu Screens—Screen 2
3.14
Ametek Instrument Panel
Trip Data
Down Press
Highlight next
line of list.
At bottom,
wrap to top
Right Press
Right Press
Correct Passcode /
Reset Trip
Data
Reset All
Highlighted
(Right & Exit
highlighted)
Wrong Passcode /
Down Press
Note 6:
Screen AO scrolls to display
the following items:
Trip Time
Idle Time
Max RPM
Avg RPM
Max Speed
Avg Speed
Avg Fuel Economy
Reset All
Exit
Right Press
AUXILIARY
SCREENS
09/23/2009
f040798
Fig. 3.13, Trip Data
3.15
Ametek Instrument Panel
IGNITION OFF
WARNING MESSAGES
/
st
Display 1 Message
in Warning
Message List
Msg Displayed for 5 Sec. /
Display Next Entry in
Warning Message List
Park Brake Off
Park Brake On
Screen AN
WARNING
Warning Message
Any Button Press
Park Brake On
No Warning
Messages in List /
Ignition On
Headlamps Off &
Marker Lamps Off &
Park Brake On
H*
DISPLAY
MESSAGES
02/06/2012
IGNITION
ON
f040799
02/06/2012
Fig. 3.14, Warning Messages
f040800
Fig. 3.15, Ignition Off (shown when ignition is keyed
OFF)
3.16
4
OptiView Instrument Panel
OptiView™ Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
OptiView Instrument Panel
OptiView™ Instrument Panel
NOTE: The OptiView instrument panel can be
customized by the body builder. The location of
gauges and icons on the instrument panel may
vary from what is shown here, but the operation
of the instrument panel is the same.
The OptiView instrument panel provides the driver
with engine and vehicle information. It is comprised
of standard and optional gauges, an audible alarm, a
driver message center, information options (menustructured format), and warning and indicator lamps
(also known as telltales). Warning and indicator
lamps illuminate in red (danger), amber (caution),
green (status advisory), or blue (high-beam headlights active).
See Fig. 4.1 for a typical instrument gauge panel
and Fig. 4.2 for the OptiView warning lamps. See
Chapter 5 for detailed warning lamp descriptions.
3
When the ignition is in the ON position, the following
actions should occur:
• warning and indicator lamps illuminate for ap-
proximately three seconds, then are extinguished;
• seatbelt indicator lamp remains on for an addi-
tional five seconds after the other indicator
lamps are extinguished;
• audible alarm sounds until the self-test is com-
pleted;
• if any faults are detected, an error message
will display in the menu area of the instrument
panel.
When the self-test is complete, all warning lamps
and indicators are extinguished.
Audible Alerts
4
2
5
6
1
9
8
10
09/29/2015
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
7
f611310
Coolant Temperature Gauge
Primary Air Pressure Gauge
Tachometer
Speedometer
Secondary Air Pressure Gauge
6. Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
7. Odometer
8. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Level
Gauge
9. Menu and Driver Message Area
10. Fuel Level Gauge
Fig. 4.1, Typical Instrument Panel, EPA10 and Newer Engines
Ignition Sequence
When the ignition is turned on, OptiView performs a
self-test. Observing the ignition sequence is a good
way to ensure the OptiView panel is functioning
properly.
IMPORTANT: Do not crank the engine until the
OptiView self-check is complete.
4.1
An audible alert sounds during the ignition sequence
until the self-test is completed, and whenever one of
the following conditions exists:
• Air pressure falls below 65 psi (448 kPa).
• Anytime the low air warning lamp is activated.
OptiView Instrument Panel
9
3
2
20
10
21
22
19
15
11
4
8
12
13
7
14
16 17 18
6
23
1
24
25
09/03/2015
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
5
f611311
High Coolant Temperature Warning
ABS Warning
Engine Brake Indicator
Water in Fuel Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
Check Engine Warning
Stop Engine Warning
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Parking Brake On Warning
Air Brake Warning
Left-Turn Indicator
Steerable Tag Axle Warning
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Lamp
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
High Exhaust System Temperature (HEST) Lamp
Right-Turn Indicator
Shift Inhibit Indicator
Transmission Warning
Transmission Overheat Warning
Fasten Seat Belt Warning
Fog Lamp Indicator
Low Windshield Washer Fluid Indicator
Headlight High-Beam Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Warning
Low Battery Voltage Warning
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning
Fig. 4.2, Warning Lamps, EPA10 and Newer Engines
• During start-up until air pressure in the tanks
reaches approximately 70 to 76 psi (483 to 524
kPa).
• When the parking brake is engaged. The park-
ing brake will not disengage until the air pressure has reached 65 psi (448 kPa).
• Emergency engine shutdown is activated.
• The parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is not in neutral.
• The transmission is in neutral or the ignition is
in the OFF position, and the parking brake is
not set and the service brake is not depressed.
• Anytime the ignition is turned OFF and the
panel lamps are still illuminated.
Emergency Shutdown
The instrument panel will shut down if the voltage
supply is not within the normal operating range of 9
to 16 volts for more than 10 milliseconds. During
emergency shutdown, the gauge pointers freeze, the
display goes blank, and the lamps turn off. When
power is restored to within the normal operating
range following an emergency shutdown, a self-test
is performed before resuming normal operation.
Menu Structure
The OptiView instrument panel is an interactive
graphical display that is capable of displaying text
messages and graphics to communicate information
about the status and performance of the vehicle to
the operator. This information is organized in a
menu-structured format around the following menu
screens:
• trip 1
• trip 2
• gauges
• fuel economy
• units
4.2
OptiView Instrument Panel
• color settings
3
• diagnostics
• menu off
2
The menus appear at the bottom-center of the instrument panel as shown in Fig. 4.1. When the instrument panel displays a message to the operator, it
appears in the menu area.
NOTE: Although cruise control is not a menu
item, the cruise control indicator appears above
the menu area when activated. See Fig. 4.3 for
an example of the cruise control indicator.
4
1
09/28/2015
f611315
Fig. 4.3, Cruise Control Indicator
5
Menu Navigation
09/02/2015
Navigating through the system menus is done with
the buttons on the right side of the steering wheel.
See Fig. 4.4. Press the "up" or "down" arrows to
highlight a menu, then press the OK button to enter
the highlighted menu. Press the "back" button to go
back to the last menu that was displayed. Press the
"home" button to return to the menus in their original
order.
f611299
1. Home Button
2. OK Button
3. Up Arrow
4. Back Button
5. Down Arrow
Fig. 4.4, Menu Navigation Buttons
Trip Menus
From the main menu, highlight "Trip 1" and press the
OK button. The top three items in the TRIP 1 screen
appear. See Fig. 4.5. Press the "down" arrow to view
the bottom three items in the TRIP 1 screen. See
Fig. 4.6. To reset the TRIP 1 information, press and
hold the OK button.
The Trip 2 menu functions the same way after highlighting "Trip 2" and pressing the OK button. See
Fig. 4.7 for the top three items in the TRIP 2 screen
and Fig. 4.8 for the bottom three items in the TRIP 2
screen. To reset the TRIP 2 information, press and
hold the OK button.
Gauge Menus
The driver can choose to display up to three gauge
menus in the menu area if desired. See Fig. 4.9.
From the main menu, select "Gauges" and press the
4.3
09/02/2015
f611300
Fig. 4.5, TRIP 1 Top Three Items
09/02/2015
f611301
Fig. 4.6, TRIP 1 Bottom Three Items
OK button. Use the "down" arrow to highlight one of
the three currently viewed gauges, then press the
OK button and the highlight will flash. Use the "up"
OptiView Instrument Panel
Press and hold the OK button to reset the distance
to empty value and the average miles per gallon/
kilometers per liter.
Units Menu
09/03/2015
f611312
Fig. 4.7, TRIP 2 Top Three Items
09/03/2015
The units menu allows the driver to choose between
English or metric units of measurement for the displayed values. See Fig. 4.11. Changing the units
only effects the speedometer, trip 1, trip 2, and fuel
economy. From the main menu, select "Units" and
press the OK button to change the units.
f611313
Fig. 4.8, TRIP 2 Bottom Three Items
09/02/2015
and "down" arrows to scroll through the available
gauges. Once you have selected the gauge to view,
press the OK button again. The highlight stops flashing and that gauge is set. Use the same process to
change the other two gauge menus.
09/02/2015
f611303
Fig. 4.9, Gauge Menus
Fuel Economy Menu
From the main menu, select "Fuel Economy" and
press the OK button. See Fig. 4.10, for an example
of the fuel economy menu.
f611304
Fig. 4.11, Units Menu
Color Settings Menu
The color settings menu allows the driver to change
the background color that appears in the gauges.
From the main menu, select "Color Settings" and
press the OK button. Then select the color—blue,
green, or white—using the "up" and "down" arrows
and press the OK button.
Diagnostics Menu
From the main menu, select "Diagnostics" and press
the OK button. Three sub-menus appear—Faults,
Internal Diagnostics, and System Information.
Faults
The Faults sub-menu, shown in Fig. 4.12, displays
the following faults should they occur:
• antilock brake system
• air pressure module
• engine
09/02/2015
f611302
Fig. 4.10, Fuel Economy Menu
The blue bar represents the average fuel economy
for this trip since the last reset.
The red bar represents the instantaneous fuel
economy that is reported by the engine.
• instrumentation
• transmission
After selecting "Diagnostics", "Faults" appears in the
list of sub-menus and is highlighted. Press the OK
button to view any active faults. See Fig. 4.13, for an
example of a fault displayed from the instrumentation
4.4
OptiView Instrument Panel
09/28/2015
f611316
09/02/2015
Fig. 4.12, Faults Sub-Menu
f611307
Fig. 4.16, Internal Diagnostic Information Screen 1
system. When there is no active fault(s), END OF
LIST appears in the menu area. See Fig. 4.14.
09/02/2015
f611308
Fig. 4.17, Internal Diagnostic Information Screen 2
09/02/2015
f611305
Fig. 4.13, Active Fault is Displayed
09/28/2015
f611318
Fig. 4.18, System Information Sub-Menu
09/02/2015
f611306
Fig. 4.14, No Active Fault Exists
Internal Diagnostics
The Internal Diagnostics sub-menu, shown in
Fig. 4.15, displays internal diagnostic information
with the current value from the OptiView instrument
panel. Use the "down" arrow to highlight "Internal
Diagnostics", then press the OK button to view the
internal diagnostic information. See Fig. 4.16 and
Fig. 4.17.
09/28/2015
f611317
Fig. 4.15, Internal Diagnostics Sub-Menu
System Information
The System Information sub-menu shows the current
software version and release date. Use the "down"
arrow to highlight "System Information", then press
the OK button to view the system information. See
Fig. 4.18 and Fig. 4.19.
4.5
09/02/2015
f611309
Fig. 4.19, System Information
NOTICE
When a memory stick with updated software is in
the USB port and the OK button is pressed, the
updater will start programming the OptiView instrument panel. Do not turn the ignition OFF during the programming cycle. Damage will occur to
the panel if the power is turned off during the
programming cycle.
The bottom line of the System Information menu indicates the current status of the software updating utility. See Fig. 4.19. In this example, the software updating utility is idle (not running).
5
Instruments
Warning and Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer and Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Collision Warning System, Eaton VORAD VS-400 (Stand Alone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1
5.5
5.6
5.8
5.8
Instruments
Warning and Indicator Lamps
an accident, possibly resulting in personal injury
or death, or property damage.
The following information describes the various warning and indicator lamps found in the Lightbar Control
Unit (LBCU), Ametek, and OptiView™ instrument panels. See Fig. 5.1 for an example, of the LBCU warning and indicator lamps, Fig. 5.2 for an example of
the Ametek warning and indicator lamps, and
Fig. 5.3 for an example of the OptiView warning and
indicator lamps.
1
2
The air brake warning lamp activates if the pneumatic brake system air is low, or if the air suspension
is low.
Auto-Idle
5
4
10
11
6
7
8
14
15
16
ABS
STOP
CHECK
9
3
Air Brake Warning
12
13
f611067
09/23/2009
1. Check Engine Warning
2. High Exhaust System
Temperature (HEST) Lamp
3. Stop Engine Warning
4. Dash Driver Display Screen
5. ABS Warning
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Transmission Warning
Engine Brake Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Left-Turn Indicator
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Lamp
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Shift Inhibit Indicator
Headlight High-Beam Indicator
Parking Brake On Warning
Low Air Pressure Warning
Wait to Start Indicator
Right-Turn Indicator
Fig. 5.1, LBCU Warning Lamps, EPA10 and Newer Engines
The instrument cluster has an emergency buzzer that
sounds when serious conditions that require immediate attention occur.
A description of the standard warning and indicator
lamps are listed below.
NOTE: The following descriptions apply to each
instrument panel where applicable and are listed
alphabetically.
ABS Warning
The ABS indicator illuminates when there is a malfunction in the vehicle antilock brake system (ABS).
NOTE: For more information about this indicator
and the ABS system, see Chapter 8.
WARNING
If the ABS warning lights come on while driving,
repair the system immediately to ensure full antilock brake capability. Operating the vehicle
when the ABS needs to be serviced could cause
5.1
The auto-idle feature will automatically increase the
engine rpm when a low system voltage is detected
under the following conditions:
• The transmission is in Park or Neutral.
• The parking brake is set.
The dash driver display screen will first display AUTO
IDLE, meaning the system voltage has dropped
below 12.2 volts, and the service brake is not on.
See Fig. 5.4. The ICU will increase the idle speed
until the battery voltage reaches 13.4 volts. Acknowledge the Auto Idle message by pressing the left
arrow button once on the toggle switch.
After the Auto Idle message is acknowledged the
BATTERY LOW VOLTAGE message will display. See
Fig. 5.5. Perform any of the following functions to
return the engine to normal operation:
• Press the service brake pedal.
• Shift the transmission out of Park or Neutral.
• Release the parking brake.
Instruments
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2
13
14
1
16
15
17
18
20
09/21/2009
1. Maintenance Warning
2. Left-Turn Indicator
3. High Exhaust System
Temperature (HEST) Lamp
4. Check Engine Warning
5. Stop Engine Warning
6. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
7. Engine Brake Indicator
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
19
f611052
Wait to Start Indicator
ABS Warning
Shift Inhibit Indicator
Transmission Warning
Stop Transmission (hybrid only)
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Lamp
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Right-Turn Indicator
Fasten Seat Belt Warning
Air Brake Warning
Hydraulic Brake System Warning
Headlight High-Beam Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Parking Brake On Warning
Fig. 5.2, Ametek Warning Lamps, EPA10 and Newer Engines
Check Engine Warning
Dash Driver Display Screen
The check engine warning indicator illuminates when
certain faults are detected. If a critical engine condition exists (for example, low oil pressure or high
coolant temperature), the check engine indicator will
illuminate to alert the driver to correct the condition
as soon as possible. If the condition gets worse, the
stop engine indicator will illuminate. See the Cummins Operation and Maintenance Manual for more
information.
The LBCU’s interactive graphical display communicates real-time information about the status and performance of the vehicle to the driver.
NOTE: If the check engine indicator illuminates
during vehicle operation, take the vehicle directly to an authorized Freightliner service facility.
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Lamp
A solid illumination indicates a regeneration is required. Change to a more challenging duty cycle,
such as highway driving, to raise exhaust temperatures for at least 20 minutes, or perform a stationary
regeneration. See Parked Regen for details.
A blinking lamp indicates that a stationary regeneration is required immediately. An engine derate and
shutdown will occur. See Parked Regen for details.
Cruise Control Indicator
Emergency Buzzer
The cruise control indicator illuminates when the
cruise control is activated.
The emergency buzzer sounds during the ignition
sequence and whenever one of the following conditions exists:
5.2
Instruments
9
3
2
20
10
21
22
19
15
11
4
8
12
13
7
14
16 17 18
6
23
1
24
25
09/03/2015
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
5
f611311
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
High Coolant Temperature Warning
ABS Warning
Engine Brake Indicator
Water in Fuel Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
Check Engine Warning
Stop Engine Warning
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Parking Brake On Warning
Air Brake Warning
Left-Turn Indicator
Steerable Tag Axle Warning
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Lamp
High Exhaust System Temperature (HEST) Lamp
Right-Turn Indicator
Shift Inhibit Indicator
Transmission Warning
Transmission Overheat Warning
Fasten Seat Belt Warning
Fog Lamp Indicator
Low Windshield Washer Fluid Indicator
Headlight High-Beam Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Warning
Low Battery Voltage Warning
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning
Fig. 5.3, OptiView Warning Lamps, EPA10 and Newer Engines
• The engine oil pressure falls below the preset
level shown in Table 5.2.
• The air pressure falls below the preset level,
which is 65 psi (448 kPa).
02/29/2008
f611001
Fig. 5.4, Auto Idle Message
• The parking brake is set with the vehicle mov-
ing at a speed greater than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Engine Brake Indicator
The engine brake indicator illuminates when the engine brake is applied.
Fasten Seat Belt Warning
02/27/2008
f611002
Fig. 5.5, Low Voltage Message
• The coolant temperature rises above the pre-
set level shown in Table 5.1.
5.3
The fasten seat belts warning indicator illuminates for
30 seconds after the ignition switch is turned on.
Fog Lamp Indicator
The fog lamp indicator illuminates when the fog
lamps are on.
Instruments
Headlight High-Beam Indicator
The high-beam indicator (sideways beam icon) illuminates when the headlight high beams are on.
High Coolant Temperature Warning
The high coolant temperature indicator and emergency buzzer activate whenever the coolant temperature goes above a preset maximum specified by
the engine manufacturer. See Table 5.1.
Maximum Coolant Temperature
Engine Model
°F (°C)
Cummins ISB
220 (104)
Table 5.1, Maximum Coolant Temperature
main on until air pressure rises above that level in
both reservoirs.
Low Battery Voltage Warning
The low battery voltage warning indicator (battery
icon) illuminates when the battery voltage drops
below 12 volts.
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Warning
The low diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) warning indicator
illuminates when the DEF tank is approximately 10%
full. Fill the DEF tank as soon as possible to avoid
engine derate (decreased engine power).
Low Fuel Indicator
High Exhaust System Temperature
(HEST) Lamp
The high exhaust system temperature (HEST) lamp
alerts the operator of high exhaust temperature during the regen process when the speed is below 5
mph (8 km/h), or during a manual regen. The HEST
lamp does not signify the need for any kind of vehicle or engine service; it only alerts the vehicle operator to high exhaust temperatures.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the engine exhaust
pipe outlet is not directed at any person, or at
any surface or material that will melt, burn, or
explode.
Hydraulic Brake System Warning
(Ametek only)
The brake system warning lamp illuminates if there is
a hydraulic brake system failure, or if the vehicle is
powered and the engine is not running.
Left-Turn Indicator
The left-turn indicator flashes on and off when the
left-turn signal lights are flashing.
Both turn signal indicators flash when the hazard
warning flasher is turned on.
Low Air Pressure Warning
The low air pressure warning indicator and emergency buzzer activate when the engine is turned on
if air pressure in the primary or secondary air reservoir is below 65 to 75 psi (448 to 517 kPa), and re-
The low fuel indicator illuminates when the fuel level
is approximately 1/8 full.
Low Oil Pressure Warning
The low oil pressure warning indicator and emergency buzzer activate whenever the engine oil pressure goes below the preset minimum specified by the
engine manufacturer. See Table 5.2.
Oil Pressure Specifications*†
At Idle Speed:
At Rated RPM:
Engine Model
psi (kPa)
psi (kPa)
Cummins ISB
10 (69)
30 (207)
* Oil pressures are given with the engine at operating temperature. With
the engine cold, oil pressure may be higher. Individual engines may vary
from the listed pressures; observe and record pressures when the engine
is new to create a guide for checking engine condition.
† EPA07 MBE900 engines have an oil pressure switch. When above
minimum pressure, the dash gauge will display the values shown in
Table 5.2. If below minimum oil pressure is reached, the dash gauge will
read 0 psi.
Table 5.2, Oil Pressure Specifications
Low Windshield Washer Fluid
Indicator
The low windshield washer fluid indicator illuminates
when the washer fluid level is low.
Maintenance Warning (Ametek only)
When the maintenance warning lamp illuminates, the
message display center will alert the driver as follows:
5.4
Instruments
• Oil Change Required—alerts the driver that the
engine has reached the recommended oil
change interval.
• Air Filter Reminder—the air filter requires
checking or replacement.
• Transmission Prognostics Warning—if the
transmission has prognostics enabled.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) indicates an
engine emissions-related fault. See the engine operation manual for details.
10/22/2015
f611319a
Fig. 5.6, Steerable Tag Axle Indicator
Parking Brake On Warning
Transmission Overheat Warning
The parking brake on indicator activates when the
parking brake is engaged.
The transmission overheat indicator illuminates when
the temperature of the transmission fluid goes above
the preset level set by the transmission manufacturer.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed of 2 mph (3 km/h)
or more, the emergency buzzer will sound until the
parking brake is released.
Right-Turn Indicator
The right-turn indicator flashes on and off when the
right-turn signal lights are flashing.
Both turn indicators flash when the hazard warning
flasher is turned on.
Shift Inhibit Indicator
The shift inhibit indicator illuminates when the transmission ECU is prohibiting shifting.
Steerable Tag Axle Warning
The steerable tag axle indicator activates when there
is a loss of air pressure at the axle. Air pressure is
needed to lock and unlock the steerable tag axle.
See Fig. 5.6.
Stop Engine Warning
The stop engine warning indicator illuminates if a
malfunction that could cause engine damage occurs.
In most cases, the engine protection warning will illuminate before the stop engine warning. When the
stop engine warning indicator illuminates, immediately park the vehicle in a safe location and shut
down the engine. Continued operation with the stop
engine warning indicator illuminated will lead to automatic engine shutdown and possible engine damage.
5.5
For more information, see the transmission manufacturer’s manual provided with the vehicle.
Transmission Warning
The transmission warning indicator will activate during vehicle operation (not during start-up) if the electronic control unit (ECU) has signaled a diagnostic
code. Diagnostic codes indicate malfunctions in
transmission operation. If this indicator stays on continuously during operation, have the transmission
serviced as soon as possible.
Wait to Start Indicator
The wait-to-start indicator lamp illuminates when the
intake heater is active. Wait until the indicator light
goes off to start the engine.
Water In Fuel Indicator
The water in fuel indicator notifies the driver the fuel
may contain water. Drain any water collected in the
fuel/water separator.
Speedometer and Tachometer
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in miles
per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). See
Fig. 5.7.
Instruments
25
15
60
20
25
10
55
RPM
5
30
x100
80
40
15
1
45
35
65
100
35
0
18
F
20
120
0
5
0
75
13
2
140
85
f610762
03/28/2005
1. Tachometer
2. Fuel Gauge
03/10/2005
3
8
E
Fig. 5.8, Tachometer (Three-In-One Gauge)
f610758
Fig. 5.7, Speedometer
Tachometer (Three-in-One Gauge)
This gauge serves three functions as follows. See
Fig. 5.8.
• Tachometer—indicates the revolutions per min-
ute (rpm) of the engine.
• Fuel Gauge—indicates the amount of fuel in
3. Voltmeter
ter measures the average voltage of all the batteries when the engine is running. When the
engine is stopped, the voltmeter shows the voltage of the engine-starting batteries.
Gauges
See Fig. 5.9 for an example of the pressure/
temperature gauges found in the instrument panel.
the fuel tank.
• Voltmeter—indicates the vehicle charging sys-
1
tem voltage when the engine is running, and
battery voltage when the engine is stopped. By
monitoring the voltmeter, the driver can be
aware of potential charging system problems
and have them repaired before the batteries
discharge enough to create starting difficulties.
The voltmeter shows the voltage of the battery
when the engine is running. The voltage of a
fully charged battery is 12.7 to 12.8 volts when
the engine is stopped. A completely discharged
battery will produce only about 12.0 volts. The
voltmeter will indicate lower voltage as the vehicle is being started or when electrical devices
in the vehicle are being used.
If the voltmeter shows an undercharged or
overcharged condition for an extended period,
have the charging system and batteries
checked at a repair facility.
2
100
H
50
0
C
PSI
1
150 PSI
2
PSI
150
100
65
100
65
0
0
3
4
03/28/2005
1.
2.
3.
4.
f610763
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Coolant Temperature Gauge
Primary Air Pressure Gauge
Secondary Air Pressure Gauge
Fig. 5.9, Pressure/Temperature Gauges
NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped (by the
body builder) with a battery isolator system and
a gel cell battery. On these vehicles, the voltme5.6
Instruments
Pressure/Temperature Gauges (Fourin-One Gauge)
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
The oil pressure gauge should read in the normal
range, from 2 to 80 psi (14 to 552 kPa).
NOTICE
A sudden decrease or absence of engine oil
pressure may indicate mechanical failure. Bring
the vehicle to a safe stop and investigate the
cause to prevent further damage. Do not operate
the engine until the cause has been determined
and corrected.
buzzer, connected to both the primary and secondary
systems, activate when air pressure in either system
drops below a minimum pressure of 65 to 75 psi
(448 to 517 kPa).
Air Intake Restriction Gauge
The air intake restriction gauge indicates the vacuum
on the engine side of the air cleaner. On standard
installations, it is mounted on the air intake duct in
the engine compartment. See Fig. 5.10. As an option
for easier viewing, the intake-air restriction indicator
can be mounted on the dash, usually on the righthand control panel.
Coolant Temperature Gauge
H20 VACUUM
NOTICE
A sudden increase in coolant temperature may
indicate engine or cooling system failure. Bring
the vehicle to a safe stop and investigate the
cause to prevent further damage. Do not operate
the engine until the cause has been determined
and corrected.
During normal engine operation, the coolant temperature gauge should read in the normal range between cold and hot. If the temperature remains below
or exceeds the normal range, inspect the cooling
system to determine the cause.
Primary and Secondary Air Pressure
Gauges
WARNING
If air pressure falls below minimum pressure, the
braking ability of the vehicle will be limited. Slow
the vehicle down and bring it to a gradual stop.
Do not attempt to move the vehicle until air pressure has risen above the minimum level. Moving
a vehicle without adequate braking power could
cause an accident resulting in property damage,
personal injury, or death.
Air pressure gauges register the pressure in the primary and secondary air systems. Normal pressure
with the engine running is 100 to 120 psi (690 to 827
kPa) in both systems.
Air pressure gauges are required on all vehicles with
air brakes. A low-air-pressure warning lamp and
5.7
IN
25
20
15
10
7
H20 VACUUM
PUSH TO RESET
05/22/97
f090176
Fig. 5.10, Air Intake Restriction Indicator
Air intake restriction vacuum is measured in inches
of water (inH2O). For vehicles equipped with a
graduated indicator or a restriction gauge on the
dash, check the gauge with the engine off. If the yellow signal stays locked in the red zone once the engine is shut down, or is at or above the maximum
restriction value in Table 5.3, the air cleaner element
needs to be replaced.
NOTE: Rain or snow can wet the filter and
cause a temporarily higher than normal reading.
Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values (inH2O)
EPA07 and
GHG14 and
Engine Make
EPA10 Engines GHG17 Engines
Cummins
25
25
Detroit
22
18
Table 5.3, Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values
Instruments
Optional Instruments
Optional instruments are not found on every vehicle.
They are stand-alones, not driven by the instrument
cluster, and are usually located on the auxiliary dash
panel.
Turbo Boost Gauge
The turbo boost gauge indicates the boost pressure
at the turbocharger, from 0 to 50 psi (0 to 345 kPa).
See the Cummins Operation and Maintenance
Manual for more information.
Transmission Temperature Gauge
The transmission temperature gauge indicates the
temperature of the transmission oil.
NOTICE
If the transmission continues to overheat during
normal operation, have it checked and repaired.
Continued operation may cause damage to the
transmission.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
IMPORTANT: Only use temporary resealing or
reinflation products that are water soluble and
state that they do not adversely affect the operation of the tire pressure sensor(s), if so
equipped.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) constantly monitors the pressure and temperature of
each tire on the vehicle, and provides tire status information to warn the driver about a tire-related problem before it becomes dangerous. Tire sensors
mounted on each wheel measure tire pressure and
temperature every 12 seconds and transmit data
every 3 to 5 minutes. If a temperature change or tire
pressure change of 3 psi (21 kPa) or greater is detected, the sensor breaks its regular schedule and
transmits tire data immediately.
For further information on the TPMS, including operation, TPMS warnings, and proper tire removal/
installation, see the Valor TPMS manual.
Collision Warning System,
Eaton VORAD VS-400 (Stand
Alone)
The Eaton VORAD VS-400 is a computerized collision warning system (CWS) that uses forwardlooking radar (FLR) to monitor objects ahead, and
optional side-mounted sensors to monitor objects
alongside the vehicle.
The system performs in fog, rain, snow, dust, smoke,
and darkness. To be detected, objects must be within
the radar beam field of view and provide a surface
area that can reflect back the radar beam.
The front-looking antenna assembly transmits radar
signals to, and receives them back from, objects
ahead of the vehicle. This allows the determination of
the distance, speed, and angle of the target ahead.
The system uses this information to warn the driver
of potentially dangerous situations.
Optional side sensors also transmit and receive radar
signals, for a distance of 2 to 10 feet (0.5 to 3 meters) alongside the vehicle. The side sensor can detect unseen objects, moving or stationary, adjacent to
the vehicle.
WARNING
The Eaton VORAD VS–400 Collision Warning
System (CWS) is intended solely as an aid for an
alert and conscientious driver. It is not intended
to be used or relied upon to operate a vehicle.
Use the system in conjunction with rearview mirrors and other instrumentation to safely operate
the vehicle. Operate this vehicle, equipped with
the VS–400 Collision Warning System, in the
same safe manner as if the VS–400 Collision
Warning System were not present.
The VS–400 Collision Warning System is not a
substitute for safe, normal driving procedures,
nor will it compensate for any driver impairment
such as drugs, alcohol, or fatigue.
The VS–400 Collision Warning System may provide little or no warning of hazards such as pedestrians, animals, oncoming vehicles, or cross
traffic.
Failure to drive safely and use the system properly could result in personal injury and/or death
and severe property damage.
5.8
Instruments
Driver Display Unit
The VORAD system controls are located in the driver
interface unit (DIU). The DIU provides visual and
audio warnings and messages. Menu selections are
made by pressing the up, down, and OK buttons.
See Fig. 5.11.
the initialization time, the screen shown in Fig. 5.12
is displayed and all the LED lamps are activated
(power-on bulb check) for approximately 3 seconds,
along with a power-up tone.
5
4
OK
3
6
OK
2
1
05/07/2007
7
05/07/2007
1. Fault Indicator
2. Info Indicator
3. Following Distance
Lights
Fig. 5.12, Initialization Screen, VORAD
f610919
4.
5.
6.
7.
Ambient Light Sensor
Collision Alert Lights
User Interface Keypad
Graphic Display
Fig. 5.11, Driver Interface Unit (DIU), VORAD
f610920
When initialization is complete, the DIU displays the
VS-400 system configuration screen. Figure 5.13
shows the screens for the VS-400 configured for Collision Warning System (CWS) and SmartCruise™,
and for CWS only.
The DIU has the following features:
• An internal speaker for audio warnings.
• Graphic display for visual warnings, menus,
VORAD started
and other information.
• User interface keypad for scrolling up, scrolling
A
Collision Warn
OK
down, and selection.
• Ambient light sensor, for auto illumination ad-
justment for daytime or night-time display.
• Programmable for driver ID with use of a PIN.
The following lights illuminate on the DIU to indicate
a message:
• Red LED—illuminates with the collision alert
display.
VORAD started
B
Collision Warn
SmartCruise
OK
• Yellow LED—illuminates with headway alert
display.
• Orange LED—illuminates when a system fail-
ure occurs.
• Blue LED—illuminates when information is
available.
Immediately after each battery power-on cycle, the
DIU initializes by executing self-test routines. During
5.9
05/07/2007
f610921
A. Configured for CWS only
B. Configured for CWS and SmartCruise
Fig. 5.13, System Configuration Screens, VORAD
Instruments
Menu Selections
IMPORTANT: The display of any menu item is
overridden whenever conditions require an alert
warning, or collision warning, to be displayed.
After initialization, the menu screen is displayed. In
this screen, the driver may scroll to the desired item
by pressing an arrow button, then pressing the OK
button to select the item. See Fig. 5.14. If the driver
does not make a selection within 30 seconds, or the
vehicle begins to move, the DIU changes to the system status display.
VORAD status
A
Collision warn OK
SmartCruise
OK
Press OK for Menu
OK
VORAD status
Collision warn
OK
B
OK
Press OK for Menu
System Status
Demo
Volume
OK
05/07/2007
f610923
A. Status display for CWS and SmartCruise
configuration
B. Status display for CWS only configuration
Fig. 5.15, System Status Screens
05/09/2007
f610922
Fig. 5.14, Menu Screen, VORAD
Demo (vehicle must be stationary)
The DIU displays menu items when the menu mode
is selected. The display of any menu item is overridden whenever conditions require an alert warning or
collision warning to be displayed. The menu items
are listed below.
When the vehicle is stationary, and the demo mode
is selected, the DIU will demonstrate the meaning of
all LED and screen displays, including alert messages and sound warnings. The demo screens are
scrolled through by pressing the down arrow. Pressing any other key exits the mode.
System Status Screen
Volume
System status is displayed under normal operating
conditions by scrolling to the "System Status" item
and then pressing the "OK" button. This screen
shows the status of each system, indicating if the
system can operate normally. If a system cannot operate normally, the system displays "Failed" beside
the system name rather than "OK". "Failed" means a
fault is preventing the system from operating and it
can not be used until the fault is corrected or acknowledged.
For configurations with adjustable volume, the minimum adjustable volume configuration is 50% of the
maximum volume. If the DIU volume is not adjustable, the display screen shows a grayed bar graph
whenever volume adjustment is selected. After each
ignition switch cycle, the volume will default to 100%.
Depending on the VS-400 system installed, one of
the following screens will appear unless a system
fault is active. Pressing OK exits this menu. See
Fig. 5.15.
One of the screens in Fig. 5.16 is displayed when
volume is selected, if conditions do not require the
display of headway alerts or warnings.
NOTE: Headway alert tones (yellow LED), and
collision alert tones (red LED), may be suppressed when the brake is applied, if the parameter is configured to do so.
5.10
Instruments
ness range are constrained such that they are always visible regardless of how low the brightness is
adjusted in all driving conditions. Pressing the OK
button exits the menu.
Volume
SmartCruise® Headway Range
OK
A
Headway range adjustment is only available in the
CWS with SmartCruise version of the VS-400 system, with headway range adjustment enabled. Headway range adjustment is selected from the main
menu with the scroll arrow, followed by pressing the
OK key to select the screen. Headway range is adjustable between 3.25 and 2.25 seconds, in 0.25
second increments, by pressing the up or down arrows. The headway range setting will default to 3.25
seconds, after each ignition power cycle.
Volume
OK
B
f610925
05/31/2007
If the headway adjust screen is selected and headway range is not enabled, then only the "3.25 sec"
screen is displayed. See Fig. 5.18 for the various
headway range screens.
A. Adjustable Volume
B. Non-Adjustable Volume
Fig. 5.16, Volume Display, VORAD
SmartCruise
Range
A
Brightness
OK
2.25 sec
The up and down arrows are used to change the
brightness. This adjustment changes the warning
LEDs and graphic display backlight brightness.
Pressing the OK button exits this screen. See
Fig. 5.17.
SmartCruise
Range
B
OK
3.25 sec
Brightness
OK
05/07/2007
f610926
SmartCruise
Range
C
fixed
3.25 sec
OK
Fig. 5.17, Brightness Screen, VORAD
The ambient light sensor reading determines if the
DIU is in daytime or nighttime mode. Menu-adjusted
brightness is applied only to the mode the DIU is in
at the time of adjustment. The previous brightness
settings are repeated after each ignition cycle. However, the graphic display and the warning LED bright5.11
05/07/2007
f610927
A. Minimum headway adjustment
B. Maximum headway adjustment
C. Headway range not enabled
Fig. 5.18, Headway Range Display, VORAD
Instruments
Pressing OK exits the menu.
If the headway range is adjusted to 3 seconds or
below, and SmartCruise is active, the 3 second collision warning headway alert will not display. All other
alerts are not suppressed.
KM/H MPH Screen
The up and down arrows are used to select either
km/h or mph units for display of SmartCruise set
speed. The previous km/h or mph setting is displayed at the next ignition cycle. See Fig. 5.19.
Forward-Looking-Radar (FLR)
Warning System
If the VS-400 reads any vehicle speed before the
forward-looking-radar has time to warm up, a single
tone will sound, and one of the following screens will
display. See Fig. 5.21. The FLR may require a
warm-up period of up to 5 minutes in extreme cold
outside temperature conditions.
Pressing OK exits this menu.
Radar Warming Up
Do not use
SmartCruise
A
OK
Speeds will be
displayed in:
OK
MPH
05/07/2007
f610928
Radar Warming Up
Please wait
B
OK
Fig. 5.19, KM/H MPH Selection Display, VORAD
Diagnostics
The DIU displays fault codes currently active when
this screen is selected. See Fig. 5.20. The vehicle
must be stationary for the fault codes to display.
Contact an authorized Freightliner dealer if fault
codes display.
DIU DIAGNOSTICS
SPN: 00886 FMI:012
OK
05/07/2007
A. FLR with SmartCruise
f610924
B. FLR Only
Fig. 5.21, FLR Warm-Up Screens, VORAD
The VS-400 FLR identifies and tracks the nearest
object in the lane of travel. This object is classified
by the range, and assigned one of the messages
shown in Fig. 5.22, Fig. 5.23, Fig. 5.24, Fig. 5.25,
and Fig. 5.26, and described under the following
seven headings.
The alerts given by the VS-400 system are based on
the “headway” to the object ahead, whenever vehicle
speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or greater.
OK
Object Detected
05/07/2007
f610929
Fig. 5.20, DIU Diagnostic Display, VORAD
When an object is in the lane of travel, the VS-400
system displays the following message and tone.
See Fig. 5.22.
• information message: OBJECT DETECTED
• tone sequence: none
5.12
Instruments
Object Detected
2
seconds
OK
05/07/2007
f610930
OK
05/07/2007
Fig. 5.22, Object Detected Alert, VORAD
f610932
Fig. 5.24, 2-Second Alert, VORAD
3-Second Headway Alert
1-Second Headway Alert
When a moving object is in the lane of travel, and
the headway is greater than 2 seconds, up to and
including 3 seconds, the DIU displays the following
message. See Fig. 5.23.
When the vehicle is closing on a moving object in the
lane of travel, and the headway is greater than 0.5
seconds, up to and including 1 second, the DIU displays the following message and tones. See
Fig. 5.25.
• information message: 3 seconds
• information message: 1 second
• tone sequence: none
• tone sequence: "1-Second closing headway
alert" tones are sounded. (Note: This tone sequence is not sounded if the brakes are
applied.)
3 seconds
OK
1
sec
05/07/2007
OK
f610931
Fig. 5.23, 3-Second Alert, VORAD
2-Second Headway Alert
When the vehicle is closing on a moving object in the
lane of travel, and the headway is greater than 1
second, up to and including 2 seconds, the DIU displays the following message and tones. See
Fig. 5.24.
• information message: 2 seconds
• tone sequence: "2-Second closing headway
alert" tones are sounded. (Note: This tone sequence is not sounded if the brakes are
applied.)
05/07/2007
f610933
Fig. 5.25, 1-Second Alert, VORAD
Collision Alert: 1/2-Second Headway
When the vehicle is closing on a moving object in the
lane of travel, and the headway is 0.5 second or
less, the DIU displays the following message and
tones. See Fig. 5.26.
• information message: COLLISION ALERT
• tone sequence: "1/2-Second closing alert"
tones are sounded continuously.
5.13
Instruments
The display brightness is automatically adjusted for daytime or nighttime operation.
• The yellow LED illuminates when no objects
COLLISION
ALERT
are detected.
• The red and yellow LEDs illuminate together
OK
05/07/2007
when there is a fault condition.
1
f610934
2
Fig. 5.26, Collision Alert, VORAD
Collision Alert: Slow Moving Object
3
See Fig. 5.26. If the headway to a slow moving object is 3 seconds or less and the vehicle turn radius
is 750 feet or more, the collision alert message is
displayed and the "slow moving object tone" is
sounded, provided:
• the vehicle speed is greater than 35 mph (56
km/h);
• the speed of the object is greater than 5 ft (1-
1/2 m) per second;
• the object is in the lane of travel, and within
220 feet (67 meters) of the vehicle;
• the object speed is less than 80% of the host
vehicle speed.
Collision Alert: Stationary Object
See Fig. 5.26. If the headway to a stationary object
is 3 seconds or less, and the vehicle turn radius is
750 feet (229 meters) or more, the collision alert
message is displayed and the "stationary object
tone" is sounded, provided the object is in the lane of
travel, and within 220 feet (67 meters) of the vehicle.
Side Sensor Display
The side sensor display is mounted on the A-pillar.
See Fig. 5.27. The following lights illuminate.
• The red LED illuminates when an object is de-
tected.
• The red LED illuminates and a triple tone is
4
f610935
05/30/2007
1. Volume Adjust
2. Red LED–Object
detected
3. Ambient light sensor
4. Yellow LED–No object
detected
Fig. 5.27, Side Sensor Display, VORAD
Special Road Situations
Certain special road situations may affect the system’s ability to detect objects. These situations include the effects of curves, dips, and hills which can
provide an unexpected result.
NOTE: A warning may sound when an object is
detected in front of the vehicle even though the
driver intends to turn away or stop before reaching the object as follows:
• When an object is detected in a very sharp
right- or left-hand turn, the audible alarm will
not sound.
• When approaching a curve, alarms may sound
and lights illuminate, because of an object off
the road directly in line with your vehicle. This
will not occur when the brakes are applied.
• Elevated obstacles such as overpasses and
sounded, when objects are detected and the
turn signal is activated.
overhead signs may be detected, when approaching a roadway descending to a lower
elevation.
• The ambient light sensor determines if the side
• Vehicles cannot be detected on the other side
sensor display is in daytime or nighttime mode.
of a hill. An alarm will not sound until the object
is within the antenna assembly’s field of view.
5.14
Instruments
• On approaching a steep hill, objects above the
beam cannot be detected. Generally, the beam
hitting the road surface does not cause an
alarm.
VORAD fault
• The side sensor only detects objects within its
Collision warn FAILED
field of view, next to the tractor. A vehicle farther back behind the field of view, will not be
detected.
OK
OK
• The side sensor range is set to detect average
sized vehicles 2 to 10 feet (0.5 to 3 meters)
away in the adjacent lane.
05/07/2007
• The radar beam will detect near range cut-ins
of approximately 30 feet (9 meters) or less,
depending on the angle of entrance into the
lane in front of your vehicle.
WARNING
Heavy rain or water spray at the side sensor may
cause both the yellow and red lights on the side
sensor display to illuminate at the same time.
Under these conditions the system is temporarily
unable to provide adequate warnings.
Failure to drive safely and use the system properly could result in personal injury and/or death
and severe property damage.
f610936
Fig. 5.28, Fault Display, VORAD
After the fault has been acknowledged by the driver
pressing the OK button, the DIU will attempt to return
to normal operations. The orange LED is continuously illuminated while the fault persists. If the fault
disappears, the VS-400 transmits a message to indicate that the fault status has changed to a previously
active fault.
In the event the FLR antennae becomes blocked
while the vehicle is moving (e.g., snow, mud, ice,
tampering, etc.), the system sounds a tone and displays the fault screen shown in Fig. 5.29.
NOTE: A continuous fixed object on the right
side of the vehicle such as a guard rail, wall,
tunnel, or bridge may cause the side sensor
alert light to stay on.
VORAD fault
Radar Blocked
OK
OK
Maintenance
Keep the antenna assembly and side sensor(s) free
of buildup of mud, dirt, ice, or other debris that might
reduce the system’s range.
05/07/2007
f610937
Fig. 5.29, Antennae Blocked Display, VORAD
Failure Display Mode/Fault Codes
The VS-400 performs internal diagnostics at powerup, then continuously monitors system components
thereafter.
If a failure is detected, depending on what features
are affected, the DIU displays a screen similar to
Fig. 5.28, blinks the orange fault light, and sounds a
tone. Press the OK button to acknowledge the fault.
Device
DIU/FLR
5.15
SPN
639
FMI
2
Previously active fault codes can be reviewed,
tested, and cleared using the Eaton Service Ranger
diagnostic tool. Contact an authorized Freightliner
dealer to review and clear previously active fault
codes. See Table 5.4 for common fault codes.
VORAD Fault Codes
Description
One or more required messages missing from datalink
Notes
—
Instruments
VORAD Fault Codes
Description
No message being received from datalink
Device cannot claim source address on datalink
Messages received with incorrect data or marked as error
FLR misaligned
FLR internally defective
FLR not configured properly
FLR blocked
DIU internally defective
Engine not configured for SmartCruise operation
Engine not supported for SmartCruise operation
VS-400 component detects incompatibility issue with
other VS-400 devices
Device
DIU/FLR
DIU/FLR
DIU/FLR
FLR
FLR
FLR
FLR
DIU
FLR
FLR
SPN
639
639
639
886
886
886
886
893
898
898
FMI
9
13
19
7
12
13
14
12
13
14
DIU/FLR
1563
13
DIU
1703
3
External right speaker shorted high
DIU
1703
4
External right speaker shorted low
DIU
1703
5
External right speaker open
DIU
1704
3
External left speaker shorted high
DIU
1704
4
External left speaker shorted low
DIU
1704
5
External left speaker open
Notes
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Tested only if SC configured
Tested only if SC configured
—
Tested only if external
speaker configured
Tested only if external
speaker configured
Tested only if external
speaker configured
Tested only if external
speaker configured
Tested only if external
speaker configured
Tested only if external
speaker configured
right
right
right
left
left
left
Table 5.4, VORAD Fault Codes
5.16
6
Driver Controls
Ignition Switch and Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Powertrain Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Braking Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.5
6.7
6.7
Driver Controls
Ignition Switch and Key
The ignition switch can be turned to four positions:
ACCESSORY, OFF, ON, and START. See Fig. 6.1.
Battery Disconnect Switch
IMPORTANT: When the batteries are disconnected (disconnect switch is turned to OFF), the
cable to the starter is still hot, as it is not connected through the disconnect switch.
3
4
2
Some chassis may be equipped with a battery disconnect switch that can be used to prevent unwanted
drain from the vehicle battery when the vehicle is not
in use or is in storage. It can also rapidly disconnect
the power supply in the event of an emergency.
Mounting locations vary. See Fig. 6.2.
1
f601179
07/10/96
1. Accessory
2. Off
damage the electrical system and result in a fire
that could cause serious personal injury or property damage.
3. On
4. Start
Fig. 6.1, Ignition Switch
The key can be inserted and removed only in the
OFF position. The headlights (low beams), brake
lights, fog lights, dome lights, clearance lights, turn
signals, hazard warning lights, and parking lights operate with the ignition switch in the OFF position, regardless of whether the key is inserted.
All of the components that are operable in the OFF
position are operable in the ACCESSORY position.
The electric gauges will not operate when the key is
in the ACCESSORY position.
Turn the key fully clockwise to the START position to
start the engine. When the engine starts, release the
key.
All electrical systems are operable in the ON position. The warning lights and the buzzer for low air
pressure and low oil pressure operate until minimum
pressures are built up.
Electrical System Controls
Servicing the electrical system requires special skills
and equipment, and should only be performed by a
qualified technician. Take the vehicle to an authorized Freightliner dealer when service is needed.
WARNING
Do not attempt to modify, add, splice, or remove
electrical wiring on this vehicle. Doing so could
6.1
06/15/2010
f545660
Fig. 6.2, Battery Disconnect Switch
Lighting Controls
Headlight, Panel Light, and Fog Light
Switches
Switches for the headlights, side marker lights, taillights, parking lights, license plate lights, panel lights,
and fog lights are located on the dash panel. See
Fig. 6.3. The headlight switch operates as follows:
• Top Position: Headlights and parking lights on.
• Middle Position: Parking lights on.
• Bottom Position: All lights off, except fog lights.
A separate dash panel dimmer switch adjusts dash
panel brightness. Push the top of the switch to increase the panel brightness. Push the bottom of the
switch to dim.
Driver Controls
A
4
B
2
C
1
S
E
T CRUISE
6
BRIGHT
OFF ON R/A
2
FOG
LIGHTS
OFF
3
3
f610957
08/14/2012
03/24/2015
A.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1
DIM
5
1. Cruise SET/COAST Button
2. Cruise OFF-ON-Resume/Accel Button
3. High-Beam Headlights (pull lever up to activate)
f611293
Headlight Switch
C. Fog Light Switch
Brightness Switch
Headlights and Parking Lights On
Parking Lights On
Lights Off
Dash Panel Brighten
Dash Panel Dim
Fog Lights On (push top of switch)
Fig. 6.3, Light Control
Fig. 6.4, Multifunction Turn Signal Switch
Marker Lamp Interrupt (SmartWheel
only)
To flash the marker lamps on or off, press and hold
the marker lamp interrupt switch on the right switch
panel of the SmartWheel. See Fig. 6.5 and Fig. 6.6.
The marker lamps will remain on or off only as long
as the switch is pressed.
The fog lights are activated by a separate switch.
Push the top of the switch to turn the fog lights on.
Push the bottom of the switch to turn the fog lights
off.
High-Beam Headlights
NOTE: The ignition switch must be on for the
high beams to work.
To activate the high-beam headlights, pull the multifunction turn signal lever up until a "clicking" sound is
heard. See Fig. 6.4. Pull the lever up until it clicks
again to turn the high-beam headlights off. The low
beams remain on during high beam operation.
When the high-beam headlights are on, a blue light
illuminates on the instrument panel. For vehicles built
for domicile in the United States, the road lights turn
off when the high beams are activated.
To flash the high beams momentarily, pull the lever
up, and release it just before the lever clicks.
Headlight Interrupt (SmartWheel only)
To turn the headlights off briefly, press and hold the
headlight interrupt switch on the left switch panel of
the SmartWheel. See Fig. 6.5 and Fig. 6.6. The
headlights will remain off only as long as the switch
is pressed.
1
3
2
f462076
06/28/2007
1. Left Switch Panel
2. Horn Pad
3. Right Switch Panel
Fig. 6.5, SmartWheel
6.2
Driver Controls
3
4
5
2
2
6
1
A
B
05/16/2007
f462077
A. Left Switch Panel
1. Cruise ON/OFF
2. Cruise SET/CANCEL/
RESUME
3. Headlight Interrupt
1
B. Right Switch Panel
4. Marker Lamp Interrupt
5. Wiper Wash/Wiper
OFF/Wiper Variable
6. Wiper HI/LOW
Fig. 6.6, SmartWheel Switch Panels
Turn Signals
Moving the multifunction turn signal lever down activates the left turn signal lights; moving it up activates
the right turn signal lights. See Fig. 6.4 for an example of the multifunction turn signal lever.
When a turn signal is activated, a green indicator
arrow flashes at the far left or far right of the instrument panel.
The lever automatically returns to the neutral position
(self-cancels the switch) when the steering wheel
returns to the straight-ahead position after a turn. To
cancel the signal manually, move the lever to the
neutral position.
Hazard Warning Lights
To activate the hazard warning lights, pull out the
hazard warning light switch located under the multifunction turn signal switch. See Fig. 6.7. When the
switch is pulled out, all of the turn control lights will
flash. To cancel the hazard warning lights, move the
turn signal switch up or down.
Windshield Wiper Controls
Standard Wiper Controls
On vehicles equipped with a standard steering
wheel, the windshield wiper control is mounted on
the dash by the body builder. Check with the body
builder for operating instructions.
6.3
10/26/2005
f462037
1. Hazard Warning Light Switch
2. Turn Signal Lever
Fig. 6.7, Hazard Warning Light Switch Location
SmartWheel Wiper Controls
NOTE: SmartWheel wiper controls are located
on the right switch panel. See Fig. 6.5 and
Fig. 6.6. Activating any wiper switch causes the
headlights to come on. To turn the headlights
off, turn the ignition off.
Wiper Wash
Press and hold the wiper wash switch, shown in
Fig. 6.6, to activate the wiper wash pump. Depending on whether the HI/LOW or variable switch was
selected, the wipers will continue to run in that mode
when the switch is released.
Wiper HI/LOW
Press the wiper HI/LOW switch, shown in Fig. 6.6, to
activate the wipers at low speed. Press the switch
again to activate the high speed. Continue pressing
the switch to toggle between high and low speed.
Wiper Variable
Press the wiper variable switch, shown in Fig. 6.6, to
activate the wipers for one low-speed wipe. Press
the switch again within approximately 30 seconds
and a second low-speed wipe will occur. The wiper
Driver Controls
interval is set by the timing between the last two
presses of the switch. Additional presses of the
switch will shorten the interval. The variable mode
will cancel if another wiper mode is selected.
Wiper OFF
Press the wiper OFF switch, shown in Fig. 6.6, to
cancel all wiper operation. Turning the ignition switch
to the OFF position has the same effect.
NOTICE
Do not shift to neutral (N) when using cruise control. This will cause the engine to overspeed,
which can damage the engine.
1.
Cruise Control
NOTE: Maximum cruise control speed varies
according to vehicle specifications, but cannot
exceed 75 mph (121 km/h).
2.
Cruise control allows the driver to automatically control the speed of the vehicle above 32 mph (51 km/
h). The switches that operate the cruise control system are located either on the turn signal lever or on
the left switch panel of a SmartWheel steering wheel.
See Fig. 6.4 for turn signal-mounted cruise control
switches. The OFF-ON-R/A (resume/accelerate)
switch allows the driver to turn cruise control on and
off, accelerate while in cruise control, or resume
cruise speed. The SET/COAST switch allows the
driver to select the cruise speed or temporarily disable the cruise control.
See Fig. 6.5 and Fig. 6.6 for SmartWheel-mounted
cruise control switches. The ON/OFF switch turns
cruise control on and off. The SET/CANCEL/RES
switch is used to set cruise control speed, accelerate
while in cruise control, temporarily disengage cruise
control, or resume cruise speed.
Turn Signal-Mounted Cruise Control
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control system when driving conditions do not permit maintaining a constant speed, such as heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow covered, slippery, or
roads with a loose driving surface. Failure to follow this precaution could cause a collision or
loss of vehicle control, possibly resulting in personal injury or property damage.
To cruise at a particular speed:
1.1
Move the slide switch on the turn signal
lever to the ON position.
1.2
Hold the accelerator pedal down until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
1.3
Press and release the SET/COAST button
at the end of the turn signal lever.
To increase the set speed, move the slide switch
on the turn signal lever to the R/A (resume/
accelerate) position.
To decrease the set speed, press and hold the
SET/COAST button until the desired speed is
reached.
3.
4.
To disengage the cruise control:
3.1
Depress the brake pedal, or
3.2
Move the slide switch on the turn signal
lever to the OFF position.
If the brake pedal was used to disengage the
cruise control, then move the slide switch to the
R/A (resume/accelerate) position to resume the
previously set speed.
NOTE: When pulling a heavy load, climbing a
very steep hill, or driving into a strong wind,
bring the vehicle up to speed with the accelerator pedal and then let the cruise control take
over.
If actual vehicle speed decreases 5 mph (8
km/h) or more below the set speed, the cruise
control will automatically disengage.
5.
To operate at high idle using the cruise control:
5.1
Place the shift lever in neutral (N).
5.2
Turn the cruise control on and accelerate
to the desired rpm. Press and release the
SET button on the turn signal switch.
5.3
Disengage by depressing the brake pedal
or turning the cruise control off at the turn
signal switch.
6.4
Driver Controls
SmartWheel-Mounted Cruise Control
NOTICE
Do not shift to neutral (N) when using cruise control. This will cause the engine to overspeed,
which can damage the engine.
1.
2.
Horn Control
The button for the horn is located in the center of
steering wheel. To sound the horn, press the center
of the steering wheel pad. See Fig. 6.8.
To cruise at a particular speed:
1.1
Press the ON button on the steering
wheel.
1.2
Hold the accelerator pedal down until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
1.3
Press the SET button on the steering
wheel.
To increase the set speed, accelerate to the desired speed, then press the SET button on the
steering wheel.
To decrease the set speed, press and hold the
SET button on the steering wheel until the desired speed is reached.
3.
4.
3.1
Depress the brake pedal, or
3.2
Press the OFF button on the steering
wheel.
If the brake pedal was used to disengage the
cruise control, press the RES button on the
steering wheel to resume the previously set
speed.
NOTE: When pulling a heavy load, climbing a
very steep hill, or driving into a strong wind,
bring the vehicle up to speed with the accelerator pedal and then let the cruise control take
over.
If actual vehicle speed decreases 5 mph (8
km/h) or more below the set speed, the cruise
control will automatically disengage.
5.
6.5
1
To disengage the cruise control:
06/28/2007
f462078a
1. Horn Pad
Fig. 6.8, Horn Control, Standard Steering Wheel
Powertrain Controls
Allison Automatic Transmissions
Allison automatic transmissions are controlled by an
electronic control unit (ECU). See Fig. 6.9 and
Fig. 6.10. See Chapter 9 for complete transmission
operating instructions.
Tag-Axle Suspension Dump Switch
5.1
Place the shift lever in neutral (N).
5.2
Turn the cruise control on and accelerate
to the desired rpm. Press and release the
SET button on the steering wheel.
The optional tag-axle suspension is a non-liftable,
full-time suspension designed to increase the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). It is used when the
rear suspension/axle will be loaded to a weight
greater than 20,000 lb (9072 kg). Under certain conditions, air can be exhausted from the air springs to
improve maneuverability or traction on the drive axle
via the tag-axle suspension dump switch.
5.3
Disengage by depressing the brake pedal
or pressing the OFF button on the steering wheel.
The tag-axle suspension dump switch is operated by
a three-position, dash-mounted rocker switch. See
Fig. 6.11. The manual TAG DUMP mode is activated
To operate at high idle using the cruise control:
Driver Controls
7
5
!
WARNING:
If "P"is not displayed
PARK BRAKE must be set.
6
4
M
O
N
I
T
O
R
S
E
L
E
C
T
M
O
N
I
T
O
R
S
E
L
E
C
T
6
7
3
8
MODE
9
N
D
10
1
06/22/2007
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
9
SERVICE
R
2
8
5
P
4
R
3
N
13
2
D
14
f270158
Drive (D) Button
Neutral (N) Button
Reverse ®) Button
Select Display
Select/Monitor Display
Window
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Monitor Display
Service Display
Mode Button
Upshift Button
Downshift Button
Fig. 6.9, GEN IV Shift Selector
by pressing the top of the rocker switch. The AUTO
DUMP mode is activated automatically during reverse gear applications when the rocker switch is
placed in the middle (level) position. When you depress the bottom of the rocker switch, the tag-axle
suspension dump switch is placed in the OFF (down)
position, and the TAG DUMP mode is inactive.
1
10
11
ARENS CONTROLS
04/02/2003
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
12
MODE
SBW Shift Selector
Drive (D) Button
Neutral (N) Button
Reverse ®) Button
Park (P) Button
Select Display
Select/Monitor Display
Window
f270122
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Monitor Display
Service Display
Mode Function Label
Mode Light
Mode Button
Upshift Button
Downshift Button
Fig. 6.10, Shift-By-Wire (SBW) Shift Selector
WARNING
If the vehicle is equipped with an air suspension
system, do not move the vehicle with the air suspension deflated. Doing so could result in a loss
of vehicle control, possibly causing personal injury and property damage.
NOTE: Chassis built with an air suspension
dump option have an automatic feature that will
not allow the suspension to be deflated unless
the parking brakes are set. The suspension will
automatically inflate when the parking brakes
are released.
Tag-Axle Suspension—Dump Only
In the TAG DUMP mode, the axle air bags will deflate when all of the following conditions are met. If
08/05/2004
f610747
Fig. 6.11, Tag-Axle Suspension Dump Switch
any of these conditions are not met, the tag-axle air
bags will fill:
• The tag-axle suspension dump switch is mo-
mentarily pressed to toggle the tag-axle control
module into the dump mode.
• The vehicle speed is less than 8 mph (13 km/
h).
6.6
Driver Controls
• The vehicle is in neutral or a forward gear.
If the vehicle exceeds a speed of 8 mph (13 km/h)
while the switch is in the TAG DUMP position, the
tag axle suspension dump switch control system will
override the TAG DUMP mode and the tag suspension air bags will refill.
IMPORTANT: The tag-axle suspension dump
switch feature must be cycled on and off of the
TAG DUMP position if an override event occurs
while the switch is in the TAG DUMP position.
In the AUTO DUMP mode, the axle air bags will deflate when all of the following conditions are met. If
any of these conditions are not met, the tag-axle air
bags will fill:
• The tag-axle suspension dump switch remains
in the AUTO DUMP mode (reverse maintained
position).
• The vehicle speed is less than 8 mph (13 km/
h).
• The vehicle is in reverse.
Tag-Axle Suspension—Dump and Tag
Wheel Steering
The tag-axle will be locked in an unsteerable position
when any of the following conditions are met:
• The vehicle is in reverse.
• The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
while accelerating or exceeds 15 mph (24
km/h) while decelerating.
The tag-axle will be unlocked and steerable when all
of the following conditions are met:
• The vehicle is in a forward gear.
• The vehicle speed is less than 20 mph (32
km/h) while accelerating or less than 15 mph
(24 km/h) while decelerating.
Braking Control
Parking Brake Control Knob
All pneumatic-braked vehicles are equipped with a
diamond-shaped parking brake control knob. See
Fig. 6.12. Pull the knob to apply the parking brake.
In air brake systems, before the parking brake can
be released, the air pressure in either brake system
must be at least 65 psi (448 kPa). See Chapter 8 for
detailed operating instructions.
6.7
03/30/2010
f421624
Fig. 6.12, Parking Brake Control Knob
Steering Control
TRW® ColumnDrive Adjustment Knob
WARNING
The ColumnDrive system will not steer the vehicle by itself. It is only intended to help assist
the driver with steering. The driver must operate
the vehicle the same way they would any other
vehicle that does not have this option. Attempting to let the ColumnDrive system operate the
vehicle without the full attention of the driver to
all road and traffic conditions, could result in
property damage, severe personal injury, or
death.
The optional TRW ColumnDrive assists the driver by
keeping the vehicle centered in a variety of conditions, such as wind or bumpy sections of highway.
Based on the driving conditions detected by the ColumnDrive sensors, the system helps provide torque
to the steering wheel and avoid the need for sudden
jerking motions from the driver.
Along with the automatic adjustments that ColumnDrive makes, the driver can also adjust the resistance of the steering wheel to their comfort level. The
adjustment knob, shown in Fig. 6.13, has six different settings. Turning the knob clockwise will increase
the amount of resistance in the steering wheel.
Driver Controls
01/19/2012
f611159
Fig. 6.13, ColumnDrive Adjustment Knob
6.8
7
Engines
Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Engine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
Exhaust Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
Exhaust Aftertreatment System (ATS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
Engine Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
Engines
Engine Starting
This engine chapter is to serve as a guide for best
practices only. Each make and model engine may
have operating characteristics that are unique to that
particular engine, and will be documented in the engine manufacturer’s literature. Always refer to specific
instructions and recommendations from the engine
manufacturer.
NOTE: Before starting the engine, read the applicable instrument panel information (Chapter 2, Chapter 3, or Chapter 4). Read Chapter 5, Instruments, and Chapter 6, Driver
Controls. Read the operating instructions in the
manufacturer’s engine operation manual before
starting the engine.
Normal Starting
IMPORTANT: Ring gear and starter pinion damage caused by improper starting procedures is
not warrantable.
NOTICE
Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time. Wait two minutes after each try to
allow the starter to cool. Failure to do so could
cause starter damage.
NOTICE
If the engine is equipped with a turbocharger,
protect the turbocharger during start-up by not
depressing the accelerator pedal until normal engine idle oil pressure registers on the gauge.
1.
Before engine start-up, complete the pre- and
post-trip inspections and maintenance procedures in Chapter 13.
2.
Set the parking brake.
3.
Place the transmission in neutral.
4.
Turn the key to the ON position and allow the
gauge sweep to complete. The audible alert will
sound for approximately four seconds.
WARNING
Do not use any starting aid, such as ether, in engines with an air intake heater. This could cause
an explosion and serious personal injury or
death.
NOTE: Cummins and Detroit engines are run on
a dynamometer before being shipped from the
factory. They do not require a break-in period.
IMPORTANT: Special break-in oils are not recommended for new or rebuilt Cummins or Detroit engines.
During cold conditions, the WAIT TO START
lamp may illuminate. Wait until the lamp goes out
before turning the key to START.
5.
After the gauge sweep has completed, turn the
key to the START position.
NOTICE
NOTICE
If a vehicle does not start on the first attempt,
make sure that the engine has completely
stopped rotating before reapplying the starter
switch. Failure to do so can cause the pinion to
release and re-engage, which could cause ring
gear and starter pinion damage.
Do not rev the engine if the oil pressure gauge
indicates no oil pressure. Shut down the engine
if oil pressure does not build within approximately ten seconds. Check to determine the
cause of the problem. Operating the engine with
no oil pressure will damage the engine.
Moving a vehicle with the starter and/or using the
starter to bump the engine for maintenance procedures is strictly prohibited. Use of these methods to bump the engine over or move the vehicle
can cause the pinion to release and re-engage,
which could cause ring gear and starter pinion
damage.
6.
NOTICE
If the oil pressure gauge indicates no oil pressure, shut down the engine within approximately
ten seconds to avoid engine damage.
7.
7.1
Apply load gradually during the warm-up period.
Check the oil pressure gauge for any drop in lubricating oil pressure or mechanical malfunction
Engines
in the lubricating oil system. Minimum oil pressure at idle is 7 psi (50 kPa).
Cold-Weather Starting
See the engine manufacturer’s operation manual for
starting aids that are approved for specific engines.
If the unit is equipped with a block heater, start the
block heater two to four hours before travel.
Starting After Extended Shutdown
Before engine start-up, complete the pretrip inspections and maintenance procedures in Chapter 13.
NOTICE
throttle whenever road conditions and speed requirements permit. This driving technique permits operating within the most economical power range of the
engine.
When approaching a hill, accelerate smoothly to start
the upgrade at full power (2000 rpm or higher is recommended), then shift down as desired to maintain
the optimum vehicle speed.
Engines are designed to operate over a wide speed
range. More frequent shifting than necessary does
not allow proper utilization of this flexibility. The driver
who stays in top gear and uses the wider speed
range will achieve the best fuel economy.
NOTICE
Failure to eliminate water-diluted lubricating oil
may lead to serious engine damage at startup.
Do not allow the engine to exceed its governed
speed, or serious engine damage could result.
An engine in storage for an extended period of time
(over winter, for example) may accumulate water in
the oil pan through normal condensation of moisture
on the internal surfaces of the engine. Oil diluted by
water cannot provide adequate bearing protection at
start-up. For this reason, change the engine oil and
filters after extended storage.
The engine is effective as a brake on downhill
grades, but take care not to overspeed the engine
going downhill. Use a combination of brakes and
gears to keep the vehicle under control at all times
and to keep the engine speed below the rated governed rpm.
Engine Operation
Normal Operation
WARNING
Do not operate the engine in an area where flammable vapors such as gasoline or diesel fumes
are present. Shut off the engine when in an area
where flammable liquids or gases are being
handled. Failure to observe these precautions
could result in serious injury or death.
Engines produce high horsepower and peak torque
characteristics at low rpm. Because of this, it is not
necessary to operate the engine at high rpm to deliver the required horsepower at the wheels. These
characteristics may also result in less shifting and
make shifting at lower rpm (to peak torque) more
practical.
Depending on the vehicle gearing, the posted speed
limit can sometimes allow operation in either of the
top two gears. However, for improved operating efficiency (fuel economy and engine life), operate in the
top gear at reduced rpm, rather than in the next
lower gear at the maximum rpm. Cruise at partial
Cold-Weather Operation
Satisfactory performance of a diesel engine operating
in low ambient temperatures requires modification of
the engine, surrounding equipment, operating practices, and maintenance procedures. The lower the
temperature, the greater the amount of modification
required. See the engine manufacturer’s operation
manual for service products approved for use in cold
weather engine operation.
If satisfactory engine temperature is not maintained,
maintenance costs will increase due to greater engine wear. If the engine coolant gets too cold, raw
fuel will wash the lubricating oil off the cylinder walls
and dilute the crankcase oil, causing all moving parts
of the engine to suffer from poor lubrication.
If the engine is in good mechanical condition and the
precautions necessary for cold-weather operation are
taken, ordinary cold weather will not cause difficulty
in starting or loss of efficiency.
The following points are important to observe when
operating in cold weather.
• Check for cracks in the battery cases, for cor-
rosion of the terminals, and for tightness of the
cable clamps at the terminals.
7.2
Engines
• Charge the batteries to full capacity. Replace
damaged batteries.
• If equipped, turn off the battery disconnect
switch after the engine is shut down to prevent
battery discharge.
• Have the alternator output checked at an au-
thorized Freightliner dealer.
• Check the condition and tension of the drive
belts.
• Refer to the engine manufacturer’s operation
manual for recommended heaters, lowviscosity lubricating oils, winter-grade fuels,
and approved coolants.
• Periodically check the coolant mix ratio (con-
centration of antifreeze in the coolant). Add
more if necessary.
• At temperatures below -4°F (-20°C), a coolant
preheater is recommended.
High-Altitude Operation
Engines lose horsepower when operated at high altitude because the air is too thin to burn as much fuel
as at sea level. Most turbocharged engines are rated
for higher altitudes than naturally aspirated engines.
An engine will have smoky exhaust at high altitudes
unless a lower gear is used. Shift gears as needed
to avoid excessive exhaust smoke.
Exhaust Brake
IMPORTANT: The exhaust brake is a vehicle
slowing device, not a vehicle stopping device. It
is not a substitute for the vehicle service brakes.
Use of the exhaust brake for vehicle downhill
control and slowing down on level terrain will
allow the service brakes to remain cool and
ready for an emergency.
WARNING
Do not use the exhaust brake if road surfaces are
slippery. Using the exhaust brake on wet, icy, or
snow-covered roads could result in loss of vehicle control, possibly causing personal injury or
death, or property damage.
The exhaust brake is activated when the following
conditions are satisfied.
1.
7.3
The ON/OFF switch is in the ON position.
2.
The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
The Allison transmission provides for optimum
retarding by downshifting when the exhaust
brake is selected. When the switch is turned ON
and the driver’s foot is removed from the accelerator pedal, the transmission will immediately
preselect a lower gear. The transmission then
starts to downshift through gears to reach the
preselected gear. Downshifting occurs at a
higher speed than is usual when the exhaust
brake is not turned on. This allows the exhaust
to provide the maximum retarding power.
Exhaust Aftertreatment System
(ATS)
Vehicles and/or engines manufactured after December 31, 2006 and domiciled in the U.S. or Canada
are required to meet all EPA and NHTSA regulations
effective as of the vehicle build date. Engines manufactured between January 1, 2007 and December 31,
2009 meet EPA07 requirements. Engines manufactured between January 1, 2010 and December 31,
2012 meet EPA10 requirements.
Model year 2013 and later vehicles meet additional
requirements as specified by NHTSA and EPA 2014
fuel efficiency and greenhouse gas emission standards (GHG14). Model year 2017 and later vehicles
meet similar requirements as specified by GHG17
requirements. These vehicles are equipped with
components that increase fuel efficiency and reduce
GHG emissions.
IMPORTANT: Depending on local jurisdictional
guidelines, vehicles that are domiciled outside of
the U.S. and Canada may not have emissions
aftertreatment systems (ATS) that are compliant
with EPA regulations.
NOTICE
Follow these guidelines for engines that comply
with EPA07 or newer regulations, or damage may
occur to the aftertreatment device (ATD) and the
warranty may be compromised.
• Use ultralow-sulfur diesel with 15 ppm sulfur
content or less.
• Do not use fuel blended with used engine lube
oil or kerosene.
Engines
• Engine lube oil must have a sulfated ash level
less than 1.0 wt %; currently referred to as
CJ-4 oil.
IMPORTANT: Using non-specification fuels or
oils can lead to shortened diesel particulate filter
(DPF) cleaning or replacement intervals. For
example, using CJ-4+ oil with 1.3% sulfated ash
(30% more ash content) may result in the need
for DPF cleaning or replacement 20 to 30%
sooner than would normally be required.
IMPORTANT: See the engine manufacturer’s
operation manual for complete details and operation of the ATS.
EPA07 Engines
Engines built between January 1, 2007 and December 31, 2009 are required to meet EPA07 guidelines
for reduced exhaust emissions of particulate matter
and nitrogen oxides (NOx). NOx is limited to just
over 1 gram per brake horsepower hour (g/bhp-hr),
and particulate matter cannot exceed 0.01 g/bhp-hr.
The EPA07 ATS varies according to engine manufacturer and vehicle configuration, but the exhaust muffler is replaced by an aftertreatment device (ATD).
Inside the ATD, the exhaust first passes over the diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC), then passes through
the diesel particulate filter (DPF), which traps soot
particles. The soot is burned to ash during a process
called regeneration (regen).
EPA10 and Newer Engines
The EPA mandates that all engines built after December 31, 2009 must reduce the level of emissions
exhausted by the engine to the following levels:
• Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) – 0.2 g/bhp-hr
• Particulate Matter (PM) – .01 g/bhp-hr
To meet EPA guidelines, engines that are compliant
with EPA10 and newer regulations use an ATS that
has, in addition to a DOC/DPF device like that used
in an EPA07 ATD, a Selective Catalytic Reduction
(SCR) device to reduce NOx downstream of the engine.
After exhaust gases leave the engine, they flow into
the ATS. First they flow into a two-part ATD, comprised of a diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC), and a
diesel particulate filter (DPF). The DPF traps soot
particles, then exhaust heat converts the soot to ash
in the DPF, in a process called regeneration (regen).
The harder an engine works, the better it disposes of
soot. Passive regen occurs when the engine is running under load and regen occurs without input. If
the engine isn’t running hot enough, the electronic
controls may initiate an active regen, whereby extra
fuel is injected into the exhaust stream before the
diesel particulate filter, to superheat the soot trapped
in the filter and reduce it to ash. Both types of regen
occur without driver input.
WARNING
Active regeneration can occur automatically anytime the vehicle is moving. The exhaust gas temperature could reach 1500°F (816°C), which is hot
enough to cause a fire, heat damage to objects
or materials, or personal injury to persons near
the exhaust outlet.
The exhaust temperature can remain high even
after the vehicle has stopped. When stopping the
vehicle shortly after an automatic regen, ensure
the exhaust outlets are directed away from structures, trees, vegetation, flammable materials, and
anything else that may be damaged or injured by
exposure to high heat.
Operating at reduced engine load will allow soot to
accumulate in the DPF. When this occurs, the DPF
lamp illuminates, indicating that a regen must be performed, and the driver must either bring the vehicle
up to highway speed to increase the load, or park
the vehicle and initiate a parked regen. See Parked
Regen, later in this chapter for instructions.
After the exhaust stream passes through the ATD, it
flows through another canister housing the SCR device. A controlled quantity of diesel exhaust fluid
(DEF) is injected into the exhaust stream, where heat
converts it to ammonia (NH3) gas. This mixture flows
through the SCR device, where the ammonia gas
reacts with the NOx in the exhaust, to produce harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), which then
exits out of the tailpipe.
ATS Warning Lamps
Warning lamps in the driver’s message center alert
the driver of situations with the ATS.
• An illuminated DPF lamp indicates a regen is
needed. See Fig. 7.1.
• A slow, 10-second flashing of the high exhaust
system temperature (HEST) lamp alerts the
driver that a parked regen is in progress, but
the exhaust temperatures are still relatively
cool. It also indicates that the high-idle speed
7.4
Engines
als, and anything else that may be damaged or
injured by prolonged exposure to high heat.
A reference label is included with the driver’s documentation package initially in the glove box, that explains the ATS warnings, and actions required to
avoid further engine protection sequences. See
Fig. 7.3.
09/25/2006
f610815a
Fig. 7.1, Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Lamp
is being controlled by the engine software, not
the driver. See Fig. 7.2.
IMPORTANT: The vehicle can have two different
ways to initiate a parked regen, depending on
the body builder. If there is not a regen switch
on the dash, go to the Shorting Plug section.
The regen switch, located on the dash, is used to
initiate a parked regen of the aftertreatment device.
See Fig. 7.4.
NOTE: The DPF lamp must be illuminated before the regen switch will initiate a parked
regen.
To initiate a parked regeneration, perform the following steps.
09/25/2006
1.
Park the vehicle away from all combustible and
flammable materials. Chock the tires. Start and
warm the engine until the coolant temperature is
at least 150°F (66°C).
2.
Set the parking brake. If the parking brake was
already set, it must be released, then set again.
f610816a
For manual transmissions, fully depress the
clutch pedal, put the transmission in neutral, then
release the pedal.
Fig. 7.2, High Exhaust System Temperature (HEST)
Lamp
• A steadily illuminated HEST lamp alerts the
operator of high exhaust temperatures when
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h) while it
is performing an automatic regen, and during a
parked regen.
• An illuminated DEF warning lamp in the gauge,
If the vehicle has a two-pedal automated transmission, shift it into gear, then back to neutral.
IMPORTANT: The driver must remain with the
vehicle during the entire regen cycle.
3.
Press and hold the regen switch for 4 seconds.
The engine will increase rpm and initiate the
regen process.
4.
The regen cycle will finish after 20 to 60 minutes,
at which time engine idle speed will drop to normal and the vehicle can be driven normally. The
HEST lamp may be illuminated, but will go out
when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h),
or the system has cooled to normal operating
temperature.
5.
To stop a parked regen at any time during the
process, engage the clutch, brake, or accelerator
pedal, or turn off the engine.
indicates that the DEF tank should be refilled
at the next opportunity.
Parked Regen
DANGER
During parked regeneration, exhaust temperatures are very high, and could cause a fire, heat
damage to objects or materials, or personal injury to persons near the exhaust outlet.
Before initiating a parked regeneration, make certain the exhaust outlets are directed away from
structures, trees, vegetation, flammable materi7.5
Engines
EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM INFORMATION
WARNING
INDICATOR
LAMP(S)
CHECK
(Solid)
(Flashing)
Level 1
Level 2
(Flashing)
CHECK
STOP
(Flashing)
Level 3
Level 4
Indicator Lamp
Message(s)
Filter Regeneration
Recommended
Filter Regeneration
Necessary
Parked Regeneration
Required − Engine
Derate
Parked Regeneration Required −
Engine Shut Down
Diesel Particulate
Filter Condition
Filter is reaching
capacity.
Filter is now
reaching maximum
capacity.
Switch.
Filter has reached
maximum capacity.
Filter has exceeded
maximum capacity.
Required Action
Bring vehicle to
highway speeds to
allow for an Automatic
Regeneration or
perform a Parked
Regeneration.
To avoid engine
derate bring vehicle
to highway speeds
to allow for an
Automatic
Regeneration or
perform a Parked
Regeneration as
soon as possible.
Vehicle must be
parked and a Parked
Regeneration must
be performed −
engine will begin
derate.
Vehicle must be parked and a
Parked Regeneration or Service
Regeneration must be performed.
Check engine operator’s manual
for details −engine will shut down.
HEST (High Exhaust
System Temperature)
Flashing
A regeneration is in
progress.
Solid
Exhaust Components
and exhaust gas are
at high temperature.
When stationary, keep
away from people and
flammable materials
or vapors.
For a driver performed Parked Regeneration, vehicle must be equipped with a dash mounted Regeneration Switch.
See Engine Operator’s Manual for complete Regeneration Instructions.
06/29/2009
24−01583−000B
f080147
Fig. 7.3, Exhaust-Aftertreatment Warnings Reference Label
1
2
3
06/19/2012
f611199
Fig. 7.4, Regen Switch
Shorting Plug
NOTE: The DPF lamp must be illuminated before the shorting plug will initiate a parked
regen.
The shorting plug is used to initiate a parked regen
of the ATD. The shorting plug is located under the
dash, next to the steering column. Mounting locations
vary. See Fig. 7.5.
To initiate a parked regeneration, perform the following steps.
f545207
02/11/2009
1. Primary Lock
2. Secondary "Red" Lock
3. Plug
Fig. 7.5, Shorting Plug
1.
Park the vehicle away from all combustible and
flammable materials. Chock the tires. Start and
warm the engine until the coolant temperature is
at least 150°F (66°C).
2.
Set the parking brake. If the parking brake was
already set, it must be released, then set again.
7.6
Engines
For manual transmissions, fully depress the
clutch pedal, put the transmission in neutral, then
release the pedal.
mable, and biodegradable. It is mildly corrosive to
aluminum, but does not affect the strength or structure of the aluminum.
If the vehicle has a two-pedal automated transmission, shift it into gear, then back to neutral.
White crystals may be noticeable around components that come into contact with DEF. The crystals
are easily removed with water.
IMPORTANT: The driver must remain with the
vehicle during the entire regen cycle.
3.
Disconnect the shorting plug, as follows.
3.1
Slide the secondary red lock away from
the white cover. See Fig. 7.5, Ref. 2.
3.2
Push the primary lock in. See Fig. 7.5,
Ref. 1.
3.3
Pull the plug apart. See Fig. 7.5, Ref. 3.
4.
Wait four seconds.
5.
Connect the shorting plug.
6.
Engine rpm will rise, and initiate the regen process.
7.
The regen cycle will finish after 20 to 60 minutes,
at which time engine idle speed will drop to normal and the vehicle can be driven normally. The
HEST lamp may be illuminated, but will go out
when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h),
or the system has cooled to normal operating
temperature. The DPF light will shut off.
8.
To stop a parked regen at any time during the
process, engage the clutch, service brake, or
accelerator pedal, or turn off the engine.
DPF Maintenance
Eventually ash will accumulate in the DPF and the
filter will require servicing. DPF servicing must be
performed by an authorized technician, following the
engine manufacturer’s instructions. A record must be
maintained for warranty purposes, that includes:
• date of cleaning or replacement;
• vehicle mileage;
• particulate filter part number and serial number.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid and Tank,
EPA10 and Newer Engines
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) is used in the ATS to
lower NOx in the exhaust stream. DEF is colorless
and close to odorless (it may have a slightly pungent
odor similar to ammonia). It is nontoxic, nonflam7.7
DEF consumption varies depending on ambient conditions and vehicle application.
Freezing Conditions
DEF freezes to slush at around 12°F (-11°C). It is not
damaged or destroyed if frozen, and is fully usable
when thawed. The DEF in the tank is allowed to
freeze while a vehicle is non-operational. At start-up,
normal operation of the vehicle is not inhibited if the
DEF is frozen; an immersion heater with engine coolant flowing through it warms the DEF once the engine is running, allowing the SCR system to operate.
Pre-2013 DEF supply lines are electrically-heated
and are purged when the engine is shut down; complete purging of the DEF lines requires approximately
five minutes after the engine is shut down.
DEF supply lines with engine model year 2013 and
newer are designed to survive freezing conditions
while containing DEF, so purging is not required.
DEF Tank
Engines that are compliant with EPA10 and newer
regulations are equipped with a DEF tank located
forward of the ATS. See Fig. 7.6. The DEF tank has
a 19 mm filler neck inlet that prevents the hose from
a diesel outlet from being inserted, and has a blue
cap for easy identification.
The DEF tank will require filling a minimum of approximately every second diesel refuel depending on
the DEF tank capacity. 10-, 13-, and 15-gallon tank
capacities are available. DEF consumption is approximately 2% of fuel consumption, dependent on
vehicle operation. For every 50 gallons of diesel fuel
consumed, approximately 1 gallon of DEF will be
consumed.
Some vehicles are equipped with a remote DEF fillport. If so equipped, the remote port is directly opposite the DEF tank on the other side of the vehicle,
and has a blue cap over the fill-port. See Fig. 7.7.
Fuel/DEF Gauge
The fuel and DEF levels are measured in a multipurpose fuel/DEF/voltmeter gauge. See Fig. 7.8.
Engines
• One bar illuminated amber—DEF very low, re-
fill DEF
3
• One bar flashing red—DEF empty, refill DEF
LBCU DEF Warnings and Engine Limits
IMPORTANT: Ignoring the DEF warning lights
and not refilling the DEF tank will result in limited engine power with a speed limit of 5 mph (8
km/h) eventually being applied. See the engine
manufacturer’s operation and maintenance
manual for further information.
1
2
06/28/2012
f490471
1. ATS
2. DEF Tank
3. DEF Gauge (optional)
Fig. 7.6, DEF Tank With Optional DEF Gauge
DEF Level—Initial Warning
When the DEF level becomes low, the following
warning strongly encourages the driver to refill the
DEF tank. See Fig. 7.9.
• One bar of the DEF-level lightbar illuminates
amber.
The DEF tank must be filled to cancel the warning
sequence.
DEF Low
When the DEF level reads low, the following warnings are activated. See Fig. 7.10.
• A LOW DEF message appears on the LBCU
driver display screen.
• One bar of the DEF-level lightbar flashes red.
• The CHECK engine lamp (amber) illuminates.
05/20/2016
f490516
Fig. 7.7, Remote DEF Fill-Port
Fuel level is indicated at the top of the gauge. Below
the fuel level, a low fuel warning lamp illuminates
amber when the fuel level drops below 1/8th of the
capacity.
The DEF lightbar indicates the level in the DEF tank
as follows.
• Four bars illuminated green—Between 75%
and 100% full
• Three bars illuminated green—Between 50%
and 75% full
• Two bars illuminated green—Between 25%
and 50% full
• One bar illuminated green—Between approxi-
mately 10% and 25% full
Engine performance is limited, with progressively
harsher engine power limits applied.
The DEF tank must be filled to cancel the warning
sequence.
DEF Empty
When the DEF tank registers empty, the following
warnings are activated. See Fig. 7.10.
• A VERY LOW DEF message appears on the
LBCU driver display screen.
• One bar of the DEF-level lightbar flashes red.
• The CHECK engine lamp illuminates.
Engine performance is limited, with progressively
harsher engine power limits applied.
The DEF tank must be filled to cancel the warning
sequence.
7.8
Engines
20
15
RPM
5
35
0
IE
SE
L
8
E
FU
EL
ON
LY
A
09/21/2009
13
R
U
FU
EL
ON
LY
D
18
F
LF
SU
13
R
U
U
8
E
35
W
LO
LF
SU
LF
SU
IE
SE
L
18
W
LO
W
LO
D
30
x100
0
RA
U LT
RA
U LT
RA
U LT
13
R
35
F
RPM
5
30
x100
25
10
0
18
F
RPM
5
20
15
25
10
30
x100
20
15
25
10
D
IE
SE
L
8
E
FU
EL
ON
LY
B
C
f611061
A. 1 to 4 lamps steady green in DEF lightbar, DEF level indicators.
B. 1 lamp steady amber in DEF lightbar, DEF very low.
C. 1 lamp flashing red in DEF lightbar, DEF empty.
Fig. 7.8, Fuel/DEF/Voltmeter Gauge
09/21/2009
A
f611062
A. DEF-Level Lightbar (1 bar solid amber)
09/21/2009
A
f611064
NOTE: The STOP engine and CHECK engine lamps
illuminate, engine power is limited, speed limit of 5 mph
(8 km/h).
A. DEF-Level Lightbar (1 bar flashing red)
Fig. 7.9, DEF Level Initial Warning
Fig. 7.11, DEF Empty and Ignored Warning
DEF Quality or SCR Tampering
NOTICE
09/21/2009
A
f611063
NOTE: Engine power is limited.
A. DEF-Level Lightbar (1 bar flashing red)
Fig. 7.10, DEF Level Low and Empty Warnings
DEF Level Empty and Ignored
If the empty warning is ignored and the DEF is not
refilled, the red STOP engine lamp illuminates in addition to the CHECK engine warning lamp. A 5 mph
(8 km/h) speed limit is applied after the next engine
shutdown or while parked and idling. See Fig. 7.11.
7.9
Once contaminated DEF has been detected in the
SCR system, the vehicle must be taken to an authorized service center to check the SCR system
for damage, and to deactivate the warning light
and engine limits.
If contaminated DEF or tampering is detected, the
SCR system activates a POOR DEF QUALITY message on the LBCU driver display screen and engine
performance is limited with progressively harsher engine power limits applied. If the fault is not corrected,
the CHECK engine lamp illuminates, then the STOP
engine lamp illuminates and a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed
Engines
limit is applied after the next engine shutdown, or
while parked and idling. See Fig. 7.11.
A
Ametek DEF Warnings and Engine Limits
IMPORTANT: Ignoring the DEF warning lights
and not refilling the DEF tank will result in limited engine power with a speed limit of 5 mph (8
km/h) eventually being applied. See the engine
manufacturer’s operation and maintenance
manual for further information.
B
10/13/2009
f611057
NOTE: Engine performance is limited.
A. DEF Warning Lamp (flashing amber)
B. DEF-Level Lightbar (1 bar flashing red)
DEF Level Low—Initial and Critical
Warnings
Fig. 7.13, DEF Empty Warning
When the DEF level reads low the following warnings
strongly encourage the driver to refill the DEF tank.
See Fig. 7.12.
• The DEF warning lamp illuminates constantly
(initial warning).
DEF Level Empty and Ignored
If the empty warning is ignored and the DEF is not
refilled, the red STOP engine lamp illuminates in addition to the DEF warning lamp and the CHECK engine warning lamp. See Fig. 7.14.
• The DEF warning lamp flashes (critical warn-
ing).
• DEF-level lightbar illuminates solid amber.
A
A
11/18/2010
10/13/2009
B
f611056
A. DEF Warning Lamp (solid amber)
B. DEF-Level Lightbar (1 bar solid amber)
Fig. 7.12, DEF Level Low Initial and Critical Warnings
DEF Empty
When the DEF level reads empty, the following warnings are activated. See Fig. 7.13.
• One bar of the DEF-level lightbar flashes red.
• The DEF warning lamp flashes.
• The CHECK engine lamp illuminates.
Engine performance is limited, with progressively
harsher engine power limits applied.
The DEF tank must be filled to cancel the warning
sequence.
B
f611059b
NOTE: The STOP engine, CHECK engine, and DEF
lamps illuminate, engine power is limited, speed limit of
5 mph (8 km/h).
A. DEF Warning Lamp (flashing amber)
B. DEF-Level Lightbar (1 bar flashing red)
Fig. 7.14, DEF Empty and Ignored Warning
If the DEF tank is not refilled, a 5 mph (8 km/h)
speed limit will be applied after the next engine shutdown, or while parked and idling.
DEF Quality or SCR Tampering
NOTICE
Once contaminated DEF has been detected in the
SCR system, the vehicle must be taken to an authorized service center to check the SCR system
for damage, and to deactivate the warning light
and engine limits.
If contaminated DEF or tampering is detected, the
DEF warning light flashes, and engine performance
is limited with progressively harsher engine power
limits applied. If the fault is not corrected, the
7.10
Engines
CHECK engine lamp illuminates, then the STOP engine lamp illuminates and a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed
limit will be applied after the next engine shutdown,
or while parked and idling. See Fig. 7.14.
OptiView™ DEF Warnings and Engine
Limits
NOTE: The OptiView instrument panel has a
DEF gauge that contains a low DEF warning
lamp, which activates when the DEF tank needs
to be refilled. Along with the DEF warning lamp
activation, warning statements appear in the
center of the OptiView panel.
DEF Level Low—Initial and Critical
Warnings
When the DEF level reads low the following warnings
strongly encourage the driver to refill the DEF tank.
• The DEF warning lamp illuminates constantly
(initial warning).
• The DEF warning lamp flashes (critical warn-
ing).
• A "LOW DEF" message appears in the center
of the instrument panel.
• A brief audible alert will notify the driver.
The DEF tank must be filled to cancel the warning
sequence.
DEF Level Very Low
The DEF tank must be filled to cancel the warning
sequence.
DEF Level Empty and Ignored
If the empty warning is ignored and the DEF is not
refilled, the red STOP engine lamp illuminates in addition to the DEF warning lamp and the CHECK engine warning lamp.
If the DEF tank is not refilled, a 5 mph (8 km/h)
speed limit will be applied after the next engine shutdown, or while parked and idling.
DEF Quality or SCR Tampering
NOTICE
Once contaminated DEF has been detected in the
SCR system, the vehicle must be taken to an authorized service center to check the SCR system
for damage, and to deactivate the warning light
and engine limits.
If contaminated DEF or tampering is detected, the
DEF warning light flashes, and engine performance
is limited with progressively harsher engine power
limits applied. If the fault is not corrected, the
CHECK engine lamp illuminates, then the STOP engine lamp illuminates and a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed
limit will be applied after the next engine shutdown,
or while parked and idling.
Engine Shutdown
When the DEF level reads very low, the following
warnings are activated.
• The DEF warning lamp flashes.
• A "VERY LOW DEF" message appears in the
center of the instrument panel.
• A brief audible alert will notify the driver.
The DEF tank must be filled to cancel the warning
sequence.
DEF Empty
When the DEF level reads empty, the following warnings are activated.
• The DEF warning lamp flashes.
• The CHECK engine lamp illuminates.
Engine performance is limited, with progressively
harsher engine power limits applied.
7.11
NOTICE
Except in an emergency, do not shut down the
engine when the coolant temperature is above
194°F (90°C). To do so could damage the engine.
1.
With the vehicle stopped, place the transmission
in the neutral (N) position and set the parking
brake.
2.
It is important to idle an engine for 3 to 5 minutes before shutting it down. This allows the lubricating oil and the coolant to carry heat away
from the combustion chambers, bearings, shafts,
and seals.
IMPORTANT: Long periods of idling are not
good for an engine because the combustion
chamber temperatures drop so low that the fuel
may not burn completely. This will cause carbon
Engines
to clog the piston rings and may result in stuck
valves.
3.
Do not idle the engine for excessively long periods.
4.
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and
shut down the engine.
7.12
8
Brake System
Air Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Antilock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Brake System
Air Brake System
General Information
WARNING
Freightliner Custom Chassis Corporation (FCCC)
neither recommends nor approves connecting a
trailer or other towed vehicle’s braking system
directly to the vehicle braking system. FCCC also
neither recommends nor approves tapping into
the vehicle air brake system nor operating a
towed vehicle or trailer’s braking system by
means of the vehicle braking system. Failure to
observe this warning could result in personal injury or death, or substantial property damage.
A dual air brake system consists of two independent
air brake systems which use a single set of brake
controls. Each system has its own reservoir, plumbing, and brake chambers. The primary system operates the service brakes on the rear axle; the secondary system operates the service brakes on the front
axle.
WARNING
Do not operate the vehicle with the front brakes
backed off or disconnected. Backing off or disconnecting the front brakes will not improve vehicle handling and may lead to loss of vehicle
control, resulting in property damage or personal
injury.
The parking brake will apply when air pressure drops
below 38 to 42 psi (262 to 290 kPa). Do not wait for
the brake to apply automatically; when the warning
light and buzzer first come on, immediately bring the
vehicle to a safe stop. Before continuing operation of
the vehicle, correct the cause of the air loss.
Air Brake System With External Fill (Schrader)
Valve
Before a vehicle with insufficient brake system air
pressure can be moved, the parking brake must be
released by applying an external air source. First
block the wheels, then turn the ignition switch to the
ON position, then fill the appropriate system air reservoir using the Schrader valve on the inlet side of
the air dryer. The parking brake will not release until
air pressure reaches 65 psi (448 kPa). The low air
buzzer will sound until air pressure reaches 65 to 73
psi (448 to 503 kPa) with the ignition switch in the
ON position.
8.1
IMPORTANT: If the air pressure in the braking
system drops back below 38 to 42 psi (262 to
290 kPa) the parking brake will reengage.
Operation
Before driving the vehicle, secure all loose items in
the cab so that they will not fly forward during a full
brake application. Make sure that all occupants are
wearing seat belts.
Allow time for the air compressor to build up a minimum of 95 psi (655 kPa) pressure in both the primary and secondary systems. Monitor the air pressure system by observing the dual system air
pressure gauges and the low-air-pressure warning
light and buzzer. The warning light and buzzer shut
off when the pressure in both systems reaches 65 to
73 psi (448 to 503 kPa).
The warning light and buzzer come on if air pressure
drops below 65 to 73 psi (448 to 503 kPa) in either
system. If this happens, check the air system pressure gauges to determine which system has low air
pressure. Although the vehicle’s speed can be reduced using the foot brake control pedal, either the
front or the rear service brakes will not be operating,
causing a longer stopping distance. Bring the vehicle
to a safe stop and have the air system repaired before continuing.
During normal brake stops, depress the foot brake
control pedal until braking action slows the vehicle.
Increase or decrease the pressure on the pedal so
that the vehicle comes to a smooth, safe stop. When
the forward speed of the vehicle has decreased almost to the idling speed of the engine, shift the
transmission into Neutral (N). Apply the parking
brake if the vehicle is to be parked.
IMPORTANT: In the event of a total loss of service brakes with full system air pressure, use
the parking brake control valve (yellow knob) to
bring the vehicle to a complete stop in the safest location possible.
The yellow diamond-shaped knob on the control
panel actuates the parking brake valve. See Fig. 8.1.
Pull the knob to apply the parking brake.
WARNING
If the vehicle is equipped with an air suspension
system, do not move the vehicle with the air suspension deflated. Doing so could result in a loss
Brake System
NOTE: After performing the burnishing procedure, there should be no brake noise and the
brakes should have good stopping ability.
5.
03/30/2010
f421624
If the brakes pull the vehicle to one side or grab
after the burnishing procedure, contact a Freightliner dealer for assistance.
Automatic Slack Adjusters
Fig. 8.1, Parking Brake Control Knob
of vehicle control, possibly causing personal injury and property damage.
NOTICE
Do not use the spring parking brakes if the service brakes are hot, such as after descending a
steep grade. Also, do not use the spring parking
brakes during freezing temperatures if the service brakes are wet. To do so could damage the
brakes if hot, or cause them to freeze during cold
weather.
If the brakes are wet, drive the vehicle in low (L)
or 1st gear and lightly apply the brakes to heat
and dry them. Allow hot brakes to cool before
using the spring parking brakes. Always chock
the tires.
Brake Burnishing (new vehicle)
IMPORTANT: Check the brake system and ensure that it is in proper operating condition before attempting the brake burnishing procedure.
1.
2.
3.
In a safe area, make 10 sharp brake applications
or "snubs," slowing the vehicle from 40 to 20
mph (64 to 32 km/h) using light (approximately
10 to 20 psi [69 to 138 kPa]) brake pressure.
Make 10 stops from 20 mph (32 km/h) using
moderate (20 to 30 psi [138 to 207 kPa]) brake
pressure.
Make 2 stops from 20 mph (32 km/h) using hard
(full application of air pressure) brake applications.
NOTE: After the hard brake applications, it is
normal to notice a hot brake odor.
4.
Next, drive the vehicle 5 to 7 miles (8 to 11 km)
allowing the brakes to cool, and then come to a
stop.
NOTICE
Manually adjusting an automatic slack adjuster to
bring the pushrod stroke within legal limits is
likely masking a mechanical problem. Adjustment
is not repairing. In fact, continual adjustment of
automatic slack adjusters may result in premature wear of the adjuster itself. Further, the improper adjustment of some automatic slack adjusters may cause internal damage to the
adjuster, thereby preventing it from properly
functioning.
Automatic slack adjusters should never be manually
adjusted except during routine maintenance of the
foundation brakes (e.g., replacing shoes), during
slack adjuster installation, or in an emergency situation.
When the brake pushrod stroke exceeds the legal
brake adjustment limit on a vehicle, there is likely a
mechanical problem with the foundation brake components or the adjuster is improperly installed.
Visit a repair facility as soon as possible when
brakes equipped with automatic slack adjusters are
determined to be out of adjustment.
Antilock Braking System (ABS)
Meritor WABCO® ABS
WARNING
Although the ABS improves vehicle control during emergency braking situations, the driver still
has the responsibility to change driving styles
depending on existing traffic and road conditions. Failure to change driving styles to accommodate existing traffic and road conditions could
cause an accident, possibly resulting in personal
injury or death, or property damage.
The Meritor WABCO ABS is an electronic wheel
speed monitoring and control system that works with
the air brake system. ABS passively monitors vehicle
8.2
Brake System
wheel speed at all times, but controls wheel speed
during an emergency or reduced-traction stop. In
normal braking applications, the standard air brake
system is in effect.
IMPORTANT: For proper ABS operation, do not
mismatch tire sizes among any of the tires on
the vehicle. Mismatching tire sizes could result
in a reduced braking force, leading to longer
stopping distances and cause an ABS event to
register on the electronic control unit (ECU).
WARNING
An accumulation of road salt, dirt, and debris on
the ABS tone wheels and sensors can cause the
ABS warning light to illuminate. If the ABS light
illuminates while driving, have the ABS serviced.
Operating the vehicle when the ABS needs to be
serviced could cause an accident, possibly resulting in personal injury or death, or property
damage.
IMPORTANT: During winter months in areas
where corrosive materials are used on the highways, periodically clean the underside of the
vehicle to ensure proper ABS functioning. The
required frequency of cleaning will vary with
conditions. In general, do not allow corrosive
materials to remain on the underside of the vehicle for extended periods of time.
The electronic control unit monitors the wheel sensors, solenoid control valves, and the electrical circuitry. The ABS warning light illuminates after turning
the ignition switch to the ON position. The warning
light goes out only if all of the vehicle’s ABS components are working properly.
The Meritor WABCO ABS combines one front-axle
control channel with the rear axle (four sensor system) to form one control circuit. For example, the
sensor and solenoid control valve at the left-front
axle form a control circuit with the sensor and solenoid valve on the right-rear axle. If, during vehicle
operation, the safety circuit senses a failure in any
part of the ABS (a sensor, solenoid control valve, wiring connections, short circuit, etc.), the ABS warning
light illuminates and the control circuit where the failure occurred is switched to normal braking action.
The remaining control circuit will retain the ABS effect. Even if the ABS is partially or completely inoperative, normal braking ability is maintained. An exception would be if a solenoid control valve (or
combination solenoid control valve) is damaged and
8.3
inoperative. As these components are an integral
part of the air brake system, normal braking may be
impaired or inoperative.
WARNING
If any of the ABS warning lights do not work as
described above or illuminates while driving, repair the ABS immediately to ensure full antilock
braking capability. Operating the vehicle when
the ABS needs to be serviced could cause an accident, possibly resulting in personal injury or
death, or property damage.
During emergency or reduced-traction stops, fully
depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a
safe stop; do not pump the brake pedal. With the
brake pedal fully depressed, the ABS will control all
wheels to provide steering control and a reduced
braking distance.
9
Transmissions
Driving Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Allison Automatic Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Transmissions
Driving Precautions
The vehicle operator should use care when accelerating or downshifting on slippery road surfaces. Sudden acceleration or engine braking, caused by shifting to a lower gear range, can result in a loss of
vehicle control. This is very important on snow- or
ice-covered roads. See Chapter 8 for information on
brake operation.
If the vehicle is stuck in sand or mud, do not attempt
to pull the vehicle out under its own power. Request
professional towing assistance.
NOTICE
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle. If rocking the
vehicle is necessary, even at low speeds, it may
cause engine overheating, axle damage, transmission damage or failure, or tire damage.
Do not coast the vehicle in neutral. Severe transmission damage may result and the vehicle will
not have the benefit of engine braking.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of personal injury, before
going down a steep or long grade, reduce speed
and down shift the treansmission. Do not hold
the brake pedal down too long or too often while
going down a steep or long grade. This could
cause the brakes to overheat, reducing their effectiveness. As a result, the vehicle will not slow
down at the usual rate. Failure to take these
steps could result in the loss of vehicle control.
To avoid skidding on slippery roads, do not downshift
into "1" (Low) at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h).
On slippery surfaces, avoid quick movements of the
steering wheel. Decrease your speed and allow for
extra stopping distance required by these conditions.
Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are
sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the
wheel rims. Drive through slowly. Allow adequate
stopping distance since wet brakes do not grip well.
After driving through water, gently apply the brakes
several times while the vehicle is moving slowly, to
dry the brakes.
When driving on icy or graveled surfaces, reduce
speed. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers.
9.1
Allison Automatic
Transmissions
NOTICE
Do not allow the vehicle to coast in neutral. This
can result in severe transmission damage. Also,
no engine braking is available.
WARNING
Never shift from neutral (N) to drive (D) or reverse (R) at engine speeds above idle. The vehicle will lurch forward or backward, which could
cause property damage and personal injury.
NOTICE
The engine should never be operated for more
than 30 seconds at full throttle with the transmission in gear and the output stalled. Prolonged
operation of this type will overheat the transmission fluid and will result in severe damage to the
transmission.
2500/3000/4000 MH Models
General Information
2500, 3000, and 4000 MH series automatic transmissions have six forward speeds and one Reverse ®)
speed. These transmissions have electronic shift
controls that can be programmed to allow the use of
different numbers of geared speeds. See Fig. 9.1.
For instance the transmission can be programmed to
operate as a 4-speed, 5-speed, or 6-speed unit in
the "primary" shift mode. If needed, a "secondary"
shift mode can be programmed to provide another
shift configuration to optimize vehicle use under different operating conditions. To activate a secondary
shift mode, or other special function programmed into
the electronic control unit (ECU), depress the Mode
button. A label just above the Mode button identifies
the special function.
The 3000 and 4000 MH series transmission
systems are designed to warn the driver of
transmission malfunctions. The driver of a vehicle equipped with these transmissions should
know the extent of the warning system in order
to safely operate the vehicle. See Chapter 5 for
information on the warning system.
Transmissions
4.
5
4
M
O
N
I
T
O
R
S
E
L
E
C
T
6
Use the up or down arrow buttons on the shift
selector to reach the desired gear.
7
3
R
2
N
D
1
MODE
5.
8
9
f270158
NOTE: The number displayed in the Digital Display window is the highest forward range available in the selected position. Visually check to confirm the range selected. If the display is flashing, the shift is inhibited.
1. Drive (D) Button
2. Neutral (N) Button
3. Reverse ®) Button
4. Select Display
5. Select/Monitor Display Window
6. Monitor Display
7. Service Display
8. Mode Button
9. Upshift Button
10. Downshift Button
Fig. 9.1, GEN IV Shift Selector
Operation
1.
Start the engine.
2.
Use Reverse ®) to back the vehicle. Completely
stop the vehicle before shifting from a forward
gear to Reverse ®) or from Reverse ®) to a forward gear. There is only one Reverse ®) gear.
3.
Use Neutral (N) and apply the parking brake
when the vehicle is parked with the engine running.
See the Allison Transmission Owner’s Manualfor
more information on 3000 and 4000 MH transmission operation.
10
06/22/2007
Occasionally the road, load, or traffic conditions
make it desirable to restrict the automatic shifting
to a lower range. The lower the gear range, the
greater the engine braking power.
Select Drive (D) for all normal driving conditions.
The vehicle will start out in First (1) gear, and as
speed increases, the transmission will upshift
through each gear automatically. As the vehicle
slows down, the transmission will downshift to
the correct gear automatically.
The pressure of your foot on the accelerator
pedal influences the automatic shifting. When the
pedal is fully depressed, the transmission will
automatically upshift near the governed speed of
the engine. A partially depressed position of the
pedal will cause the upshifts to occur at a lower
engine speed.
NOTE: In the lower gear ranges, the transmission will not upshift above the highest gear selected unless the engine governed speed is
exceeded.
2100/2500 Models (Arens SBW)
General Information
The Arens shift-by-wire (SBW) push-button shift selector is part of an electronic shift control system
used with Allison series 2100/2500 5-speed automatic transmissions. An electronic actuator is
mounted to the transmission.
The 2100/2500 series transmissions have a park
pawl and the SBW selector has a Park (P) position.
See Fig. 9.2.
In case the vehicle needs to be towed and the SBW
system cannot be activated to move the transmission
out of Park (P), a manual procedure is provided to
shift the transmission. At the actuator, on the transmission, a port is provided to insert an Allen wrench
to shift the transmission manually.
Calibrating Arens SBW
If the vehicle shuts down in gear and will not start,
check the two 10-amp fuses. Then check to see if
either one or two Ns appear on the transmission
shifter and the vehicle will not start. To reset the
transmission shifter, turn the ignition to the "ON" position. On the transmission shifter, go through the
following sequence of N-R-N-D-N. This should reset
the shifter and allow the vehicle to start.
Transmission Operation
1.
At the top left side of the selector, is the select
display. On the left side of the display window,
an LED character indicates which gear has been
selected.
9.2
Transmissions
7
!
WARNING
WARNING:
If "P"is not displayed
PARK BRAKE must be set.
6
M
O
N
I
T
O
R
S
E
L
E
C
T
Always place the transmission in the Park (P) or
Neutral (N) position and set the parking brake
before releasing the service brakes and exiting
the vehicle. Otherwise the vehicle could move
unexpectedly and cause an accident, possibly
resulting in personal injury and property damage.
8
9
SERVICE
5
P
4
R
3
N
13
2
D
14
1
10
11
ARENS CONTROLS
04/02/2003
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
IMPORTANT: If the ignition switch is turned to
the OFF position before selecting Park (P), a
buzzer will sound and the monitor display will
show the gear that is currently engaged. Select
Park (P) to turn off the buzzer and the display.
Also, with the engine not running (ignition switch
in the ON position and park pawl not engaged),
a buzzer will sound and the monitor display will
show an N for Neutral (N). Select Park (P) to
turn off the buzzer and the display.
12
MODE
f270122
SBW Shift Selector
Drive (D) Button
Neutral (N) Button
Reverse ®) Button
Park (P) Button
Select Display
Select/Monitor Display
Window
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Monitor Display
Service Display
Mode Function Label
Mode Light
Mode Button
Upshift Button
Downshift Button
Fig. 9.2, SBW Shift Selector (2100/2500 series)
2.
At the top right side of the selector, is the monitor display. On the right side of the display window, an LED character indicates which gear is
actually engaged.
WARNING
4.
WARNING
Do not leave the vehicle if the transmission is in
Neutral (N) without first setting the parking brake.
The vehicle could roll or move unexpectedly and
cause an accident, possibly resulting in personal
injury and property damage.
5.
Select the N button to place the transmission in
Neutral (N). An N will appear on both sides of
the display window. The vehicle may be started
in Neutral (N).
6.
Select the D button to place the transmission in
Drive (D). The transmission will automatically
shift through the full range of First (1) through
Fifth (5) gears. When Drive (D) is first selected,
the display will show D1, indicating that Drive (D)
was selected and that First (1) gear is engaged.
As the transmission automatically upshifts and
downshifts, the display will show the gear currently engaged (D1, D2, D3, D4, or D5).
7.
With the transmission in Drive (D), select the
downshift (down arrow) button to manually downshift one gear at a time, from Fifth (5) to First (1).
The select display will show the selected gear
and the monitor display will show the gear currently engaged. From D5 at the top of the Drive
(D) range, the display will show 44, 33, 22, and
If the Park (P) position is selected and the letter
P does not appear on the monitor side of the display window, the parking brake must be set. Otherwise the vehicle could move unexpectedly and
cause an accident, possibly resulting in personal
injury and property damage.
NOTE: Only the 1000/2400 series 5-speed
transmissions have a park pawl and a Park (P)
button.
3.
9.3
The Park (P) button shifts the transmission to
Neutral (N) and engages the park pawl. When
Park (P) is selected, the monitor side of the display window will show a letter P.
Select the R button to place the transmission in
Reverse ®). An R will appear on both sides of
the display window.
Transmissions
11 as progressively lower gears are manually
selected.
NOTE: The transmission will remain in the
manually selected gear until Drive (D) is selected. Select Drive (D) at any time during the
manual downshifting sequence (or upshift progressively to Drive [D] using the up arrow button) and the transmission will upshift and downshift automatically.
8.
With the transmission in 11, 22, 33, or 44, select
the upshift (up arrow) button to manually upshift
one gear at a time until Drive (D) is selected.
The select display will show the selected gear
and the monitor display will show the gear currently engaged. From 11 at the bottom of the
Drive (D) range, the display will show 22, 33, 44,
and D5 as progressively higher gears are manually selected.
NOTE: The transmission will remain in the
manually selected gear until Drive (D) is selected. Select Drive (D) at any time during the
manual upshifting sequence and the transmission will upshift and downshift automatically.
9.
The function of the mode button may vary from
vehicle to vehicle. The label above the button
identifies the function.
10. A light in the upper right-hand corner of the
mode button illuminates when the mode function
is active.
IMPORTANT: An illuminated service display may
indicate a loss of safety back-up systems. Use
extra care when shifting to ensure that the
transmission is operating properly.
11. The service display illuminates if a fault is de-
tected in the SBW system. Have a qualified technician inspect the SBW system as soon as possible.
12. A flashing select/monitor display indicates that
the transmission (and not the SBW system) has
inhibited a selected transmission operation. See
the Allison Transmission Operator’s Manual for
more information.
9.4
10
Steering System
Power Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Steering Column Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Steering System
Power Steering System
NOTE: When there is no load on the vehicle
and the front tires are pointed straight ahead,
the steering wheel spokes should be at the 9
and 3 o’clock positions or within 10 degrees to
either side. See Fig. 10.1.
A
The body builder is responsible for centering the
steering wheel.
B
2
10°
10°
1
2
10°
10°
1
f462091
08/14/2007
06/28/2007
f462089
1. 9 o’Clock
2. 3 o’Clock
Fig. 10.1, Steering Wheel Centered
Steering Column Adjustment
TRW Tilt/Telescope Steering Column
WARNING
Never try to tilt or telescope the steering column
while driving the vehicle. Doing so could cause
loss of vehicle control and result in personal injury, or death, or property damage.
To tilt the steering column, press down on the foot
pedal (located below the steering wheel) to release
the steering column lock. Adjust the column to the
desired position. Release the foot pedal to lock the
steering column in place. To telescope the steering
column, lift up the lever on the steering column. Pull
the steering wheel upward or push it downward until
it is at the desired height. Release the lever to lock
the steering column in place. See Fig. 10.2.
10.1
A. Telescope
1. Foot Pedal
B. Tilt
2. Lever
Fig. 10.2, TRW Tilt/Telescope Steering Column (typical)
NOTE: For safety, the steering column is locked
at all times unless the foot pedal is depressed
or if the lever is engaged.
11
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
Instrumentation Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
Exhaust Aftertreatment System (ATS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.10
Allison Automatic Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17
Hydraulic Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.19
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
Instrumentation Control Unit
Dash Message Center
Figure 11.1 shows a typical set of instruments for
vehicles equipped with the MC Recreational Vehicle
instrument cluster (ICU3-M2).
The dash message center houses all of the standard
and optional warning and indicator lights. Warning
messages and diagnostic fault codes will appear in
the driver display screen.
The MC Recreational Vehicle instrument cluster is an
updated version of the basic electronic dashboard
(ICU-3). It can accept information from the datalink
and sensors installed on the vehicle, and sends that
information to electronic gauges.
The instrument cluster has the capability to drive independent stand-alone gauges such as those installed on the auxiliary dash panel. Figure 11.2
shows a typical dash.
Ignition Sequence
When the ignition is turned on, all the electronic
gauges complete a full sweep of their dials, the
warning and indicator lights light up, and the buzzer
sounds for 3 seconds. See Fig. 11.3 for the ignition
sequence.
The following lamps illuminate during the ignition sequence:
• fasten seat belt warning
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
11
11/09/2009
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
10
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Dash Message Center
Headlight High-Beam Indicator
Dash Driver Display Screen
Fuel Level Gauge
6.
7.
8.
9.
9
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
Primary Air Pressure Gauge
Mode/Reset Switch
Secondary Air Pressure Gauge
10.
11.
12.
13.
f611083
8
Speedometer
Tachometer (optional)
Transmission Temperature Gauge
Coolant Temperature Gauge
Fig. 11.1, Gauge Layout (typical, U.S.), EPA10 and Newer Engines
• low battery voltage warning
• high coolant temperature warning
11.1
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
2
3
4
1
5
10/11/2001
f610578
NOTE: Instruments and controls, and their locations, may vary from those shown.
1. L/H Control Panel
2. Instrumentation Control Unit (ICU3-M2)
3. R/H Control Panel
4. Auxiliary Dash Panel
5. Climate Control Panel
Fig. 11.2, Dash Panel Layout (typical)
• low engine oil pressure warning
• parking brake on indicator
• all engine indicator/warning lights, including
check engine and engine protection
NOTE: While the engine and ABS warning lights
illuminate during the ignition sequence, they are
not controlled by the instrument cluster but by
their own system ECU (electronic control unit).
When the ignition switch has been turned on, the
ICU performs a self-test, looking for active faults.
During the first half of the self-test, all segments of
the display will illuminate as follows.
• First line (odometer): "888888.8"
• Second line (units): "TRIP MI KM HOURS"
• Third line (voltmeter): "38.8 VOLTS SERVICE"
• Fourth line: "ENGINE"
During the second half of the self-test, the software
revision level is displayed.
If there are no active faults, the driver display screen
displays the odometer.
If however, the instrument cluster has received active
fault codes from the other devices, it displays them
one after the other until the parking brake is released, or the ignition switch is turned off. Once the
parking brake is released, the dash message center
displays the odometer again.
NOTE: If active faults are present, take the vehicle to an authorized Freightliner service facility
as soon as possible.
If the fault requires immediate attention, the engine
protection system will activate. In most cases, the
check engine lamp will also illuminate.
Some examples include:
11.2
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
HEADLIGHTS ON
POWER ON
IGNITION ON
888888.8
TRIP MI KM HOURS
38.8 VOLTS
SERVICE
ENGINE
ODOMETER
SCREEN
ICU PERFORMS SELF−TEST:
ELECTRONIC GAUGE NEEDLES
SWEEP, WARNING/INDICATOR
LIGHTS COME ON, BUZZER SOUNDS
IF NO FAULTS
WERE DETECTED
123456.7
IF FAULT DETECTED
ABS 136
MI
12.3 VOLTS
FAULT CODE
SCREEN
PARK BRAKE
RELEASED − MOVING
123456.7
10/24/2001
RELEASE PARK BRAKE
MI
12.3 VOLTS
f040420b
Fig. 11.3, Ignition Sequence
• high coolant temperature
• low coolant level
• low engine oil pressure
NOTE: The check engine lamp does not illuminate for a low air pressure fault.
The legend SERVICE ENGINE can appear on the
driver display screen as an active fault code. If this
legend appears, it means the trip miles (or hours)
have gone beyond the next required service interval,
as set by the vehicle operator.
IMPORTANT: If the legend SERVICE ENGINE
appears on the driver display screen while operating the vehicle, bring the vehicle to an authorized Freightliner service facility when convenient.
The odometer is set to display in either miles or kilometers, depending on the primary scale of the
speedometer. The legend, either "MI" or "KM", illuminates between the odometer and the volts display
when the engine is running or the headlights are
turned on.
Mode/Reset Switch
The mode/reset switch is located on the right side of
the instrument cluster. See Fig. 11.4. The mode/reset
switch is used to scroll through the displays on the
message display screen, and to reset the trip distance and trip hours values to zero.
PUSH−
MODE
HOLD−
RESET
Odometer
The odometer is a seven-digit display with a decimal
point, until the vehicle has traveled 999,999.9 miles
or kilometers (km). At one million miles (km), the
odometer resets itself to "1000000", without the decimal point, and can continue up to 9,999,999. The
odometer only displays significant figures (no leading
zeros).
11.3
09/25/99
f610340
Fig. 11.4, Mode/Reset Switch
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
When the odometer reading is displayed and the
parking brake is applied:
• Press the mode/reset switch once and the trip
distance will display.
• Press the mode/reset switch a second time
1 2
OPT
4
3
OPT
OPT
5
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
ABS
STOP
CHECK
6
7
OPT
OPT
ABS
and the trip hours (engine hours) will display.
• Press the mode/reset switch a third time and
the SELECT screen and the current units, MI
or KM, will display.
• Press the mode/reset switch a fourth time to
return to the odometer reading.
To reset trip miles and/or trip hours to zero,
press the mode/reset switch for 1 second or
longer. To toggle between MI (miles) or KM
(kilometers), press the mode/reset switch while
in the SELECT screen.
Warning and Indicator Lamps
There can be up to 27 warning and indicator lamps
(telltales) installed in the dash message center. See
Fig. 11.5.
The instrument cluster has an emergency buzzer that
sounds when serious conditions that require immediate attention occur.
A description of the standard warning and indicator
lamps are listed below.
Check Engine Warning
The check engine warning indicator illuminates when
certain faults are detected. If a critical engine condition exists (for example, low oil pressure or high
coolant temperature), the check engine indicator will
illuminate to alert the driver to correct the condition
as soon as possible. If the condition gets worse, the
stop engine indicator will illuminate.
NOTE: If the check engine indicator illuminates
during vehicle operation, take the vehicle directly to an authorized Freightliner service facility.
Stop Engine Warning
The stop engine warning indicator illuminates when
the protection system available for the engine has
been activated. On some engines, the engine electronic control unit (ECU) will derate the engine, allowing it to run, but at lower rpm and slower vehicle
speed. The vehicle may be driven to a safe location.
8
14
9
15
10
16 17
13
11 12
20
21
19
18
07/08/2011
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
f611066
Optional Indicator
Check Engine Warning
Stop Engine Warning
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
ABS Warning
Transmission Overheat Warning
Trailer ABS Indicator (not used)
Low Oil Pressure Warning
High Coolant Temperature Warning
Fasten Seat Belt Warning
Parking Brake On Warning
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Lamp
High Exhaust System Temperature (HEST) Lamp
Left-Turn Indicator
Low Battery Voltage Warning
Water In Fuel Indicator
Dash Driver Display Screen
Headlight High-Beam Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Low Air Pressure Warning
Right-Turn Signal Arrow
Fig. 11.5, Warning and Indicator Lights, EPA10 and
Newer Engines
The engine ECU will derate the engine. The driver
must safely bring the vehicle to a stop on the side of
the road.
NOTICE
Because operating the engine when the stop engine indicator is illuminated can lead to severe
engine damage, the driver must move the vehicle
to a safe location as quickly as possible.
To restart the engine turn the ignition switch to OFF,
leave it there a few seconds, and turn the switch to
START.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to restart the engine while the vehicle is moving. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and restart the engine with
the vehicle stopped.
11.4
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Fasten Seat Belt Warning
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) indicates an
engine emissions-related fault. See the engine operation manual for details.
The fasten seat belts warning indicator illuminates for
15 seconds after the ignition switch is turned on.
ABS Warning
The ABS indicator illuminates when there is a malfunction in the vehicle antilock brake system (ABS).
Parking Brake On Warning
The parking brake on indicator activates when the
parking brake is engaged.
NOTE: For more information about this indicator
and the ABS system, see Chapter 8.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed of 2 mph (3 km/h)
or more, the emergency buzzer will sound until the
parking brake is released.
Transmission Overheat Warning
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Lamp
The transmission overheat indicator illuminates when
the temperature of the transmission fluid goes above
the preset level set by the transmission manufacturer.
A solid illumination indicates a regeneration is required. Change to a more challenging duty cycle,
such as highway driving, to raise exhaust temperatures for at least 20 minutes, or perform a stationary
regeneration. See Parked Regen for details.
For more information, see the transmission manufacturer’s manual provided with the vehicle.
Low Oil Pressure Warning
The low oil pressure warning indicator and emergency buzzer activate whenever the engine oil pressure goes below the preset minimum specified by the
engine manufacturer. See Table 11.1.
Oil Pressure Specifications*†
At Idle Speed:
At Rated RPM:
Engine Model
psi (kPa)
psi (kPa)
Cummins ISB
10 (69)
30 (207)
* Oil pressures are given with the engine at operating temperature. With
the engine cold, oil pressure may be higher. Individual engines may vary
from the listed pressures; observe and record pressures when the engine
is new to create a guide for checking engine condition.
† EPA07 MBE900 engines have an oil pressure switch. When above
minimum pressure, the dash gauge will display the values shown in
Table 11.1. If below minimum oil pressure is reached, the dash gauge
will read 0 psi.
Table 11.1, Oil Pressure Specifications
A blinking lamp indicates that a stationary regeneration is required immediately. An engine derate and
shutdown will occur. See Parked Regen for details.
High Exhaust System Temperature
(HEST) Lamp
A slow (10-second) flash, indicates a regeneration is
in progress, and the driver is not controlling the engine idle speed.
A solid illumination indicates potentially hazardous
exhaust temperatures at the outlet of the tail pipe if
speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h). It does not signify
the need for service; it only alerts the vehicle operator of high exhaust temperatures. See the engine
operation manual for details.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the engine exhaust
pipe outlet is not directed at any person, or at
any surface or material that will melt, burn, or
explode.
High Coolant Temperature Warning
Left-Turn Indicator
The high coolant temperature indicator and emergency buzzer activate whenever the coolant temperature goes above a preset maximum specified by
the engine manufacturer. See Table 11.2.
The left-turn indicator flashes on and off when the
left-turn signal lights are flashing.
Maximum Coolant Temperature
Engine Model
°F (°C)
Cummins ISB
220 (104)
Table 11.2, Maximum Coolant Temperature
11.5
Both turn signal indicators flash when the hazard
warning flasher is turned on.
Low Battery Voltage Warning
The low battery voltage warning indicator (battery
icon) illuminates when the battery voltage drops
below 12 volts.
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
Water In Fuel Indicator
Air Filter Indicator
The water in fuel indicator notifies the driver the fuel
may contain water. Drain any water collected in the
fuel/water separator.
The air filter indicator (AIR FILTER legend) illuminates when the air cleaner filter element is clogged.
If the air filter indicator light is steadily illuminated for
any period of time, check the air intake restriction
gauge. If the yellow signal stays locked in the red
zone once the engine is shut down, or is at or above
the maximum restriction value in Table 11.3, replace
the air cleaner element.
Headlight High-Beam Indicator
The high-beam indicator (sideways beam icon) illuminates when the headlight high beams are on.
Cruise Control Indicator
The cruise control indicator illuminates when the
cruise control is activated.
Low Air Pressure Warning
The low air pressure warning indicator and emergency buzzer activate when the engine is turned on
if air pressure in the primary or secondary air reservoir is below 65 to 75 psi (448 to 517 kPa), and remain on until air pressure rises above that level in
both reservoirs.
Right-Turn Indicator
The right-turn indicator flashes on and off when the
right-turn signal lights are flashing.
Both turn indicators flash when the hazard warning
flasher is turned on.
Emergency Buzzer
The emergency buzzer sounds during the ignition
sequence and whenever one of the following conditions exists:
IMPORTANT: Never attempt to clean the air filter.
Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values (inH2O)
EPA07 and
GHG14 and
Engine Make
EPA10 Engines GHG17 Engines
Cummins
25
25
Detroit
22
18
Table 11.3, Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values
Alternator No Charge Indicator
The alternator no charge indicator (NO CHARGE legend) illuminates when the alternator is not charging
properly.
Speedometer and Tachometer
Speedometer
Three kinds of speedometer faces are available. The
U.S. version of the speedometer registers speed in
both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour
(km/h), with mph in larger numbers. See Fig. 11.6.
• The engine oil pressure falls below the preset
level shown in Table 11.1.
• The coolant temperature rises above the pre-
15
set level shown in Table 11.2.
20 25
35
30
25
10
15
• The air pressure falls below the preset level,
5
which is 65 psi (448 kPa).
50
5
RPM
X100
55
90
65
110
30
75
130
10
0
• The parking brake is set with the vehicle mov-
45
70
85
km/h
MPH
ing at a speed greater than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Optional Warning and Indicator
Lamps
A description of some commonly used optional warning and indicator lamps are listed below.
1
2
10/09/2001
1. Tachometer
f610527
2. Speedometer
Fig. 11.6, Speedometer and Tachometer
The NAFTA version (not shown) of the speedometer
face reverses this arrangement, with km/h in larger
11.6
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
numbers. The metric-only version (not shown) shows
km/h exclusively.
engine will derate or shut down, depending on the
type of engine protection system installed.
Tachometer
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm) and serves as a guide for shifting
the transmission and keeping the engine in the appropriate rpm range. See Fig. 11.6. For low idle and
rated rpm, see the engine identification plate.
Gauges
Coolant Temperature Gauge
NOTICE
A sudden increase in coolant temperature may
indicate engine or cooling system failure. Bring
the vehicle to a safe stop and investigate the
cause to prevent further damage. Do not operate
the engine until the cause has been determined
and corrected.
NOTICE
A sudden decrease or absence of oil pressure
may indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle
to a safe stop and investigate the cause to prevent further damage. Do not operate the engine
until the cause has been determined and corrected.
The engine oil pressure gauge is mission-critical.
See Fig. 11.8. If the engine oil pressure falls below
the preset levels shown in Table 11.1, first, the check
engine light will illuminate, and, if the condition does
not improve, the engine protection light will also illuminate and the buzzer will sound. At this point, the
engine will derate or shut down, depending on the
type of engine protection system installed.
During normal engine operation, the coolant temperature gauge should read 175 to 195°F (79 to
91°C). See Fig. 11.7. If the temperature remains
below 160°F (71°C) or exceeds the maximum temperature shown in Table 11.2, inspect the cooling
system to determine the cause. See the vehicle
workshop manual for troubleshooting and repair
procedures.
50
PSI
0
100
OIL
10/09/2001
150
200
Fig. 11.8, Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Fuel Level Gauge
F°
100
250
WATER
10/09/2001
f610565
Fig. 11.7, Coolant Temperature Gauge
The coolant temperature gauge is mission-critical.
See Fig. 11.7. If the coolant temperature rises above
the preset levels shown in Table 11.2, first, the check
engine light will illuminate, and, if the condition does
not improve, the engine protection light will also illuminate and the buzzer will sound. At this point, the
11.7
f610528
The fuel level gauge indicates the level of fuel in the
fuel tank(s). See Fig. 11.9. For more detailed information on the fuel gauge used with EPA10 and
newer engines, see Diesel Exhaust Fluid and Tank,
EPA10 and Newer Engines. One fuel gauge is standard. If equipped with a second (optional) fuel gauge,
each fuel tank level is indicated on a separate
gauge.
Transmission Fluid Temperature Gauge
The transmission fluid temperature gauge is optional.
During normal operation, the transmission fluid temperature gauge reading should not exceed 250°F
(121°C) at the sump. See Fig. 11.10.
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
It indicates the vehicle charging system voltage when
the engine is running and the battery voltage when
the engine is stopped. By monitoring the voltmeter,
the driver can be aware of potential charging system
problems and have them fixed before the batteries
discharge enough to create starting difficulties.
The voltmeter will normally show approximately 13.7
to 14.1 volts when the engine is running. The voltage
of a fully charged battery is 12.7 to 12.8 volts when
the engine is stopped. Battery voltage under 12.0
volts is considered a low battery, and a completely
discharged battery will produce only about 11.0 volts.
The voltmeter will indicate lower voltage as the vehicle is being started or when electrical devices in
the vehicle are being used.
09/17/2009
f611048
Fig. 11.9, Fuel Gauge, EPA10 and Newer Engines
If the voltmeter shows an undercharged or overcharged condition for an extended period, have the
charging system and batteries checked at a repair
facility.
Optional Instruments
200
Optional instruments are not found on every vehicle.
They are stand-alones, not driven by the instrument
cluster, and are usually located on the auxiliary dash
panel. They are listed here in alphabetical order, to
make the information easier to find.
275
F
125
Ammeter
350
TRANS
10/30/2001
f610600
Fig. 11.10, Transmission Fluid Temperature Gauge
NOTICE
A sudden increase in transmission fluid temperature that is not caused by a load increase may
indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle to a
safe stop and investigate the cause to prevent
further damage. Do not operate the vehicle until
the cause has been determined and corrected.
NOTE: Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep grades, temperatures may climb
above those given here for limited periods.
Voltmeter
The voltmeter is a digital readout located on the bottom line of the driver display screen whenever the
ignition switch is turned on.
The ammeter measures current flowing to and from
the battery. See Fig. 11.11. When the batteries are
being charged, the meter needle moves to the plus
side of the gauge; when the batteries are being discharged, the needle moves to the minus side. A consistent negative reading when the engine is running
indicates a possible problem with the charging
system.
Axle Oil Temperature Gauge, Rear
NOTICE
A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not
caused by a load increase may indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and
investigate the cause to prevent further damage.
Do not operate the engine until the cause has
been determined and corrected.
During normal operation, the rear axle oil temperature gauge should read between 160 and 220°F (71
and 104°C) for Detroit™ and Meritor™ drive axles.
See Fig. 11.12.
11.8
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
10/10/2001
f610573
10/11/2001
Fig. 11.11, Ammeter
f610576
Fig. 11.13, Digital Clock
display; no PM display indicates an AM setting.
10/10/2001
1.2
Advance the hour setting to the correct
number by pushing and releasing the hour
button as many times as needed. Or if the
button is pressed and held in for longer
than 2 seconds, the numbers will continue
to advance until the button is released.
1.3
Advance the minute setting by repeatedly
pushing, or pushing and holding the minute button as needed.
1.4
Push the Run/Set switch to the middle
(RUN) position.
f610571
Fig. 11.12, Axle Oil Temperature Gauge
2.
Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep
grades, temperatures up to a maximum of 250°F
(121°C) are not unusual.
To set the alarm time:
2.1
Push the Run/Set switch to the left
(ALARM-SET position).
2.2
Set the alarm time by using the same procedure that you used to set the time of
day; remember to set the hour for A.M.
(no letters in the corner of the display), or
P.M. as desired.
2.3
Return the Run/Set switch to the middle
(RUN) position; the readout will return to
the time-of-day setting.
Digital Clock
The digital clock has black characters on a constantly backlighted green display, with a brightness
that automatically adjusts for day or night. The clock
has a 24-hour alarm, with a three-minute snooze feature. See Fig. 11.13.
1.
To set the time of day:
1.1
Push the Run/Set (lower) switch to the
right (TIME-SET position).
NOTE: When the hour setting is for a time
between noon and midnight, the small letters
PM will appear in the lower left corner of the
11.9
3.
To operate the alarm:
3.1
With the alarm time set, push the alarm
(upper) switch to the left. An alarm "wave"
symbol and the letters AL will appear in
the upper left corner of the display when
the alarm is on.
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
3.2
When the displayed time of day coincides
with the alarm time, the alarm will sound.
If the SNOOZ button is not pushed or the
alarm switch is not moved, the alarm will
automatically stop sounding after 1 minute
and will not sound again for 24 hours.
3.3
If desired, press the SNOOZ button while
the alarm is sounding to shut the alarm off
for 3 minutes. The alarm symbol will flash
in the display when the button is pushed
and will continue to flash until the alarm
switch is moved or the alarm has sounded
for one minute. The snooze procedure can
be done as many times as desired.
3.4
Move the alarm switch to the right when
you wish to shut off or cancel the alarm;
the alarm symbol will disappear.
tion value in Table 11.3, replace the air cleaner element.
NOTE: Rain or snow can wet the filter and
cause a temporarily higher than normal reading.
Pyrometer
A pyrometer can be installed on the exhaust pipe
and registers the exhaust temperature near the turbocharger. See Fig. 11.15. Maximum exhaust temperatures are listed in Table 11.4.
Variations in engine load can cause exhaust temperatures to vary. If the pyrometer reading shows
that exhaust temperature exceeds normal, reduce
fuel to the engine until the exhaust temperature is
reduced. Shift to a lower gear if the engine is
overloaded.
Air Intake Restriction Gauge
The intake-air restriction indicator measures the
vacuum on the engine side of the air cleaner at the
air cleaner outlet. See Fig. 11.14. On standard installations, it is mounted on the intake air piping in the
engine compartment.
10/10/2001
f610570
Fig. 11.15, Pyrometer
Maximum Exhaust Temperature
Engine Model
°F (°C)
Cummins ISB
1290 (700)
Table 11.4, Maximum Exhaust Temperature
Turbocharger Boost Pressure Gauge
10/10/2001
f610568
Fig. 11.14, Air Intake Restriction Gauge
Air intake restriction vacuum is measured in inches
of water (inH2O). For vehicles equipped with a graduated indicator or a restriction gauge on the dash,
check the gauge with the engine off. If the yellow
signal stays locked in the red zone once the engine
is shut down, or is at or above the maximum restric-
A turbocharger boost pressure gauge measures the
pressure in the intake manifold, in excess of atmospheric pressure, being created by the turbocharger.
See Fig. 11.16.
Exhaust Aftertreatment System
(ATS)
Vehicles and/or engines manufactured after December 31, 2006 and domiciled in the U.S. or Canada
11.10
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
IMPORTANT: Using non-specification fuels or
oils can lead to shortened diesel particulate filter
(DPF) cleaning or replacement intervals. For
example, using CJ-4+ oil with 1.3% sulfated ash
(30% more ash content) may result in the need
for DPF cleaning or replacement 20 to 30%
sooner than would normally be required.
IMPORTANT: See the engine manufacturer’s
operation manual for complete details and operation of the ATS.
EPA07 Engines
10/10/2001
f610574
Fig. 11.16, Turbo Boost Pressure Gauge
are required to meet all EPA and NHTSA regulations
effective as of the vehicle build date. Engines manufactured between January 1, 2007 and December 31,
2009 meet EPA07 requirements. Engines manufactured between January 1, 2010 and December 31,
2012 meet EPA10 requirements.
Model year 2013 and later vehicles meet additional
requirements as specified by NHTSA and EPA 2014
fuel efficiency and greenhouse gas emission standards (GHG14). Model year 2017 and later vehicles
meet similar requirements as specified by GHG17
requirements. These vehicles are equipped with
components that increase fuel efficiency and reduce
GHG emissions.
IMPORTANT: Depending on local jurisdictional
guidelines, vehicles that are domiciled outside of
the U.S. and Canada may not have emissions
aftertreatment systems (ATS) that are compliant
with EPA regulations.
NOTICE
Follow these guidelines for engines that comply
with EPA07 or newer regulations, or damage may
occur to the aftertreatment device (ATD) and the
warranty may be compromised.
• Use ultralow-sulfur diesel with 15 ppm sulfur
content or less.
• Do not use fuel blended with used engine lube
oil or kerosene.
• Engine lube oil must have a sulfated ash level
less than 1.0 wt %; currently referred to as
CJ-4 oil.
11.11
Engines built between January 1, 2007 and December 31, 2009 are required to meet EPA07 guidelines
for reduced exhaust emissions of particulate matter
and nitrogen oxides (NOx). NOx is limited to just
over 1 gram per brake horsepower hour (g/bhp-hr),
and particulate matter cannot exceed 0.01 g/bhp-hr.
The EPA07 ATS varies according to engine manufacturer and vehicle configuration, but the exhaust muffler is replaced by an aftertreatment device (ATD).
Inside the ATD, the exhaust first passes over the diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC), then passes through
the diesel particulate filter (DPF), which traps soot
particles. The soot is burned to ash during a process
called regeneration (regen).
EPA10 and Newer Engines
The EPA mandates that all engines built after December 31, 2009 must reduce the level of emissions
exhausted by the engine to the following levels:
• Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) – 0.2 g/bhp-hr
• Particulate Matter (PM) – .01 g/bhp-hr
To meet EPA guidelines, engines that are compliant
with EPA10 and newer regulations use an ATS that
has, in addition to a DOC/DPF device like that used
in an EPA07 ATD, a Selective Catalytic Reduction
(SCR) device to reduce NOx downstream of the engine.
After exhaust gases leave the engine, they flow into
the ATS. First they flow into a two-part ATD, comprised of a diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC), and a
diesel particulate filter (DPF). The DPF traps soot
particles, then exhaust heat converts the soot to ash
in the DPF, in a process called regeneration (regen).
The harder an engine works, the better it disposes of
soot. Passive regen occurs when the engine is running under load and regen occurs without input. If
the engine isn’t running hot enough, the electronic
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
controls may initiate an active regen, whereby extra
fuel is injected into the exhaust stream before the
diesel particulate filter, to superheat the soot trapped
in the filter and reduce it to ash. Both types of regen
occur without driver input.
WARNING
Active regeneration can occur automatically anytime the vehicle is moving. The exhaust gas temperature could reach 1500°F (816°C), which is hot
enough to cause a fire, heat damage to objects
or materials, or personal injury to persons near
the exhaust outlet.
09/25/2006
f610815a
Fig. 11.17, Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Lamp
The exhaust temperature can remain high even
after the vehicle has stopped. When stopping the
vehicle shortly after an automatic regen, ensure
the exhaust outlets are directed away from structures, trees, vegetation, flammable materials, and
anything else that may be damaged or injured by
exposure to high heat.
Operating at reduced engine load will allow soot to
accumulate in the DPF. When this occurs, the DPF
lamp illuminates, indicating that a regen must be performed, and the driver must either bring the vehicle
up to highway speed to increase the load, or park
the vehicle and initiate a parked regen. See Parked
Regen, later in this chapter for instructions.
After the exhaust stream passes through the ATD, it
flows through another canister housing the SCR device. A controlled quantity of diesel exhaust fluid
(DEF) is injected into the exhaust stream, where heat
converts it to ammonia (NH 3) gas. This mixture
flows through the SCR device, where the ammonia
gas reacts with the NOx in the exhaust, to produce
harmless nitrogen (N 2) and water vapor (H 2O),
which then exits out of the tailpipe.
ATS Warning Lamps
Warning lamps in the driver’s message center alert
the driver of situations with the ATS.
• An illuminated DPF lamp indicates a regen is
needed. See Fig. 11.17.
• A slow, 10-second flashing of the high exhaust
system temperature (HEST) lamp alerts the
driver that a parked regen is in progress, but
the exhaust temperatures are still relatively
cool. It also indicates that the high-idle speed
is being controlled by the engine software, not
the driver. See Fig. 11.18.
09/25/2006
f610816a
Fig. 11.18, High Exhaust System Temperature (HEST)
Lamp
• A steadily illuminated HEST lamp alerts the
operator of high exhaust temperatures when
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h) while it
is performing an automatic regen, and during a
parked regen.
• An illuminated DEF warning lamp in the gauge,
indicates that the DEF tank should be refilled
at the next opportunity.
Parked Regen
DANGER
During parked regeneration, exhaust temperatures are very high, and could cause a fire, heat
damage to objects or materials, or personal injury to persons near the exhaust outlet.
Before initiating a parked regeneration, make certain the exhaust outlets are directed away from
structures, trees, vegetation, flammable materials, and anything else that may be damaged or
injured by prolonged exposure to high heat.
11.12
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
NOTE: The DPF lamp must be illuminated before the regen switch will initiate a parked
regen.
A reference label is included with the driver’s documentation package initially in the glove box, that explains the ATS warnings, and actions required to
avoid further engine protection sequences. See
Fig. 11.19.
To initiate a parked regeneration, perform the follow-
EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM INFORMATION
WARNING
INDICATOR
LAMP(S)
CHECK
(Solid)
(Flashing)
Level 1
Level 2
CHECK
(Flashing)
STOP
(Flashing)
Level 3
Level 4
Indicator Lamp
Message(s)
Filter Regeneration
Recommended
Filter Regeneration
Necessary
Parked Regeneration
Required − Engine
Derate
Parked Regeneration Required −
Engine Shut Down
Diesel Particulate
Filter Condition
Filter is reaching
capacity.
Filter is now
reaching maximum
capacity.
Switch.
Filter has reached
maximum capacity.
Filter has exceeded
maximum capacity.
Required Action
Bring vehicle to
highway speeds to
allow for an Automatic
Regeneration or
perform a Parked
Regeneration.
To avoid engine
derate bring vehicle
to highway speeds
to allow for an
Automatic
Regeneration or
perform a Parked
Regeneration as
soon as possible.
Vehicle must be
parked and a Parked
Regeneration must
be performed −
engine will begin
derate.
Vehicle must be parked and a
Parked Regeneration or Service
Regeneration must be performed.
Check engine operator’s manual
for details −engine will shut down.
HEST (High Exhaust
System Temperature)
Flashing
A regeneration is in
progress.
Solid
Exhaust Components
and exhaust gas are
at high temperature.
When stationary, keep
away from people and
flammable materials
or vapors.
For a driver performed Parked Regeneration, vehicle must be equipped with a dash mounted Regeneration Switch.
See Engine Operator’s Manual for complete Regeneration Instructions.
06/29/2009
24−01583−000B
f080147
Fig. 11.19, Exhaust-Aftertreatment Warnings Reference Label
IMPORTANT: The vehicle can have two different
ways to initiate a parked regen, depending on
the body builder. If there is not a regen switch
on the dash, go to the Shorting Plug section.
The regen switch, located on the dash, is used to
initiate a parked regen of the aftertreatment device.
See Fig. 11.20.
ing steps.
1.
Park the vehicle away from all combustible and
flammable materials. Chock the tires. Start and
warm the engine until the coolant temperature is
at least 150°F (66°C).
2.
Set the parking brake. If the parking brake was
already set, it must be released, then set again.
For manual transmissions, fully depress the
clutch pedal, put the transmission in neutral, then
release the pedal.
If the vehicle has a two-pedal automated transmission, shift it into gear, then back to neutral.
IMPORTANT: The driver must remain with the
vehicle during the entire regen cycle.
06/19/2012
f611199
Fig. 11.20, Regen Switch
11.13
3.
Press and hold the regen switch for 4 seconds.
The engine will increase rpm and initiate the
regen process.
4.
The regen cycle will finish after 20 to 60 minutes,
at which time engine idle speed will drop to normal and the vehicle can be driven normally. The
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
HEST lamp may be illuminated, but will go out
when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h),
or the system has cooled to normal operating
temperature.
5.
To stop a parked regen at any time during the
process, engage the clutch, brake, or accelerator
pedal, or turn off the engine.
If the vehicle has a two-pedal automated transmission, shift it into gear, then back to neutral.
IMPORTANT: The driver must remain with the
vehicle during the entire regen cycle.
3.
Shorting Plug
NOTE: The DPF lamp must be illuminated before the shorting plug will initiate a parked
regen.
The shorting plug is used to initiate a parked regen
of the ATD. The shorting plug is located under the
dash, next to the steering column. Mounting locations
vary. See Fig. 11.21.
1
2
3
Disconnect the shorting plug, as follows.
3.1
Slide the secondary red lock away from
the white cover. See Fig. 11.21, Ref. 2.
3.2
Push the primary lock in. See Fig. 11.21,
Ref. 1.
3.3
Pull the plug apart. See Fig. 11.21, Ref. 3.
4.
Wait four seconds.
5.
Connect the shorting plug.
6.
Engine rpm will rise, and initiate the regen process.
7.
The regen cycle will finish after 20 to 60 minutes,
at which time engine idle speed will drop to normal and the vehicle can be driven normally. The
HEST lamp may be illuminated, but will go out
when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h),
or the system has cooled to normal operating
temperature. The DPF light will shut off.
8.
To stop a parked regen at any time during the
process, engage the clutch, service brake, or
accelerator pedal, or turn off the engine.
DPF Maintenance
f545207
02/11/2009
1. Primary Lock
2. Secondary "Red" Lock
3. Plug
Fig. 11.21, Shorting Plug
To initiate a parked regeneration, perform the following steps.
1.
2.
Park the vehicle away from all combustible and
flammable materials. Chock the tires. Start and
warm the engine until the coolant temperature is
at least 150°F (66°C).
Set the parking brake. If the parking brake was
already set, it must be released, then set again.
For manual transmissions, fully depress the
clutch pedal, put the transmission in neutral, then
release the pedal.
Eventually ash will accumulate in the DPF and the
filter will require servicing. DPF servicing must be
performed by an authorized technician, following the
engine manufacturer’s instructions. A record must be
maintained for warranty purposes, that includes:
• date of cleaning or replacement;
• vehicle mileage;
• particulate filter part number and serial number.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid and Tank,
EPA10 and Newer Engines
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) is used in the ATS to
lower NOx in the exhaust stream. DEF is colorless
and close to odorless (it may have a slightly pungent
odor similar to ammonia). It is nontoxic, nonflammable, and biodegradable. It is mildly corrosive to
aluminum, but does not affect the strength or structure of the aluminum.
11.14
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
White crystals may be noticeable around components that come into contact with DEF. The crystals
are easily removed with water.
DEF consumption varies depending on ambient conditions and vehicle application.
Freezing Conditions
DEF freezes to slush at around 12°F (-11°C). It is not
damaged or destroyed if frozen, and is fully usable
when thawed. The DEF in the tank is allowed to
freeze while a vehicle is non-operational. At start-up,
normal operation of the vehicle is not inhibited if the
DEF is frozen; an immersion heater with engine coolant flowing through it warms the DEF once the engine is running, allowing the SCR system to operate.
Pre-2013 DEF supply lines are electrically-heated
and are purged when the engine is shut down; complete purging of the DEF lines requires approximately
five minutes after the engine is shut down.
DEF supply lines with engine model year 2013 and
newer are designed to survive freezing conditions
while containing DEF, so purging is not required.
ond diesel refuel. DEF consumption is approximately
2% of fuel consumption, dependent on vehicle operation. For every 50 gallons of diesel fuel consumed,
approximately 1 gallon of DEF will be consumed.
Fuel/DEF Gauge
The fuel and DEF levels are measured in a dual purpose fuel/DEF gauge. See Fig. 11.23.
Fuel level is indicated at the top of the gauge. Below
the fuel level, a low fuel warning lamp illuminates
amber when the fuel level drops below 1/8th of the
capacity.
The lower portion of the gauge has a DEF warning
lamp that illuminates when the DEF tank is near
empty, and a DEF lightbar that indicates the level in
the DEF tank as follows.
• Four bars illuminated green—Between 75%
and 100% full
• Three bars illuminated green—Between 50%
and 75% full
• Two bars illuminated green—Between 25%
and 50% full
DEF Tank
Engines that are compliant with EPA10 and newer
regulations are equipped with a DEF tank located
forward of the ATS. See Fig. 11.22. The DEF tank
has a 19 mm filler neck inlet that prevents the hose
from a diesel outlet from being inserted, and has a
blue cap for easy identification.
• One bar illuminated green—Between approxi-
mately 10% and 25% full
• One bar illuminated amber—DEF very low, re-
fill DEF
• One bar flashing red—DEF empty, refill DEF
DEF Warnings and Engine Limits
IMPORTANT: Ignoring the DEF warning lights
and not refilling the DEF will result in limited engine power with a speed limit of 5 mph (8 km/h)
eventually being applied. See the Cummins Operation and Maintenance Manual for further information.
3
DEF Level Low—Initial and Critical
Warnings
1
06/28/2012
1. ATS
2. DEF Tank
2
f490471
3. DEF Gauge (optional)
Fig. 11.22, DEF Tank With Optional DEF Gauge
The DEF tank has a 10-gallon capacity and will require filling a minimum of approximately every sec11.15
When the DEF level reads low the following warnings
strongly encourage the driver to refill the DEF tank.
See Fig. 11.24.
• The DEF warning lamp illuminates constantly
(initial warning).
• The DEF warning lamp flashes (critical warn-
ing).
• DEF-level lightbar illuminates solid amber.
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
1/2
1/2
1/2
ULTRA LOW SULFUR
DIESEL FUEL ONLY
ULTRA LOW SULFUR
DIESEL FUEL ONLY
ULTRA LOW SULFUR
DIESEL FUEL ONLY
E
F
E
DEF
E
1
F
E
DEF
F
E
2
A
F
DEF
F
E
B
F
C
11/08/2010
f611037
A. Green bars—DEF level indicators.
B. One bar illuminated amber—DEF very low, refill DEF.
1. Low Fuel Warning Lamp (amber at 1/8 tank of fuel)
C. One bar flashing red—DEF empty, refill DEF.
2. Low DEF Warning Lamp
Fig. 11.23, Fuel/DEF Gauge
A
A
B
B
07/09/2009
f470537
A. DEF Warning Lamp (solid amber)
B. DEF-Level Lightbar (1 bar solid amber)
Fig. 11.24, DEF Level Low Initial and Critical Warnings
DEF Empty
When the DEF level reads empty, the following
lamps notify the driver. See Fig. 11.25.
07/09/2009
f470538
NOTE: Engine power is limited.
A. DEF Warning Lamp (flashing amber)
B. DEF-Level Lightbar (1 bar flashing red)
Fig. 11.25, DEF Empty Warning
dition to the DEF warning lamp and the CHECK engine warning lamp. See Fig. 11.26.
• The DEF warning lamp flashes amber.
If the DEF tank is not refilled, a 5 mph (8 km/h)
speed limit will be applied after the next engine shutdown, or while parked and idling.
• The CHECK engine lamp illuminates.
DEF Quality or SCR Tampering
• One bar of the DEF-level indicator flashes red.
Engine performance is limited, with progressively
harsher engine power limits applied.
The DEF tank must be filled to cancel the warning
sequence.
DEF Level Empty and Ignored
If the empty warning is ignored and the DEF is not
refilled, the red STOP engine lamp illuminates in ad-
NOTICE
Once contaminated DEF or tampering has been
detected in the SCR system, the vehicle must be
taken to an authorized service center to check
the SCR system for damage, and to deactivate
the warning light and engine limits.
11.16
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
The 1000/2200/2350 series transmission has a park
pawl and the SBW selector has a Park (P) position.
The 2100 series transmission has a park brake (Pb)
button. See Fig. 11.27 and Fig. 11.28.
A
7
B
!
WARNING:
If "P"is not displayed
PARK BRAKE must be set.
6
11/18/2010
M
O
N
I
T
O
R
S
E
L
E
C
T
f470540b
8
9
NOTE: The STOP engine, CHECK engine, and DEF
lamps illuminate, engine power is limited, speed limit of
5 mph (8 km/h).
A. DEF Warning Lamp (flashing amber)
B. DEF-Level Lightbar (1 bar flashing red)
SERVICE
5
P
4
R
3
N
13
2
D
14
10
11
12
MODE
Fig. 11.26, DEF Empty and Ignored Warning
If contaminated DEF or tampering is detected, the
DEF warning light flashes, and engine power is limited with progressively harsher limits applied. If the
fault is not corrected, the STOP engine light illuminates and a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed limit is applied
after the next engine shutdown, or while parked and
idling. See Fig. 11.26.
1
ARENS CONTROLS
04/02/2003
Allison Automatic
Transmissions
NOTICE
Do not allow the vehicle to coast in neutral. This
can result in severe transmission damage. Also,
no engine braking is available.
NOTICE
The engine should never be operated for more
than 30 seconds at full throttle with the transmission in gear and the output stalled. Prolonged
operation of this type will overheat the transmission fluid and will result in severe damage to the
transmission.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Monitor Display
Service Display
Mode Function Label
Mode Light
Mode Button
Upshift Button
Downshift Button
In case the vehicle needs to be towed and the SBW
system cannot be activated to move the transmission
out of Park (P), a manual procedure is provided to
shift the transmission. At the actuator, on the transmission, a port is provided to insert an Allen wrench
to shift the transmission manually.
Transmission Operation
1.
At the top left side of the selector, is the select
display. On the left side of the display window,
an LED character indicates which gear has been
selected.
2.
At the top right side of the selector, is the monitor display. On the right side of the display window, an LED character indicates which gear is
actually engaged.
General Information
11.17
f270122
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Fig. 11.27, SBW Shift Selector (1000/2200/2350 series)
1000/2100/2200/2350 MH Models
The Arens shift-by-wire (SBW) push-button shift selector is part of an electronic shift control system
used with Allison series 1000/2100/2200/2350
5-speed automatic transmissions. An electronic actuator is mounted on the transmission.
SBW Shift Selector
Drive (D) Button
Neutral (N) Button
Reverse ®) Button
Park (P) Button
Select Display
Select/Monitor Display
Window
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
7
!
WARNING
WARNING:
If "P"is not displayed
PARK BRAKE must be set.
6
M
O
N
I
T
O
R
S
E
L
E
C
T
Always place the transmission in the Park (P) or
Neutral (N) position and set the parking brake
before releasing the service brakes and exiting
the vehicle. Otherwise the vehicle could move
unexpectedly and cause an accident, possibly
resulting in personal injury and property damage.
8
9
SERVICE
5
Pb
4
R
3
N
13
2
D
14
1
10
11
f270122a
Shift Selector
Drive (D) Button
Neutral (N) Button
Reverse ®) Button
Park Brake (Pb)
Button
6. Select Display
7. Select/Monitor Display
Window
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Monitor Display
Service Display
Mode Function Label
Mode Light
Mode Button
Upshift Button
Downshift Button
Do not leave the vehicle if the transmission is in
Neutral (N) without first setting the parking brake.
The vehicle could roll or move unexpectedly and
cause an accident, possibly resulting in personal
injury and property damage.
5.
Select the N button to place the transmission in
Neutral (N). An N will appear on both sides of
the display window. The vehicle may be started
in Neutral (N).
6.
Select the D button to place the transmission in
Drive (D). The transmission will automatically
shift through the full range of First (1) through
Fifth (5) gears. When Drive (D) is first selected,
the display will show D1, indicating that Drive (D)
was selected and that First (1) gear is engaged.
As the transmission automatically upshifts and
downshifts, the display will show the gear currently engaged (D1, D2, D3, D4, or D5).
7.
With the transmission in Drive (D), select the
downshift (down arrow) button to manually downshift one gear at a time, from Fifth (5) to First (1).
The select display will show the selected gear
and the monitor display will show the gear currently engaged. From D5 at the top of the Drive
(D) range, the display will show 44, 33, 22, and
11 as progressively lower gears are manually
selected.
Fig. 11.28, SBW Pushbutton Shift Selector with Park
Brake (Pb) Button (2100 series)
WARNING
If the Park (P) position is selected and the letter
P does not appear on the monitor side of the display window, you must set the parking brake.
Otherwise the vehicle could move unexpectedly
and cause an accident, possibly resulting in personal injury and property damage.
NOTE: Only the 1000/2200/2350 MH model
transmissions have a park pawl and a Park (P)
button.
3.
Select the R button to place the transmission in
Reverse ®). An R will appear on both sides of
the display window.
WARNING
ARENS CONTROLS
10/25/2005
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
4.
12
MODE
The Park (P) button shifts the transmission to
Neutral (N) and engages the park pawl. When
Park (P) is selected, the monitor side of the display window will show a letter P.
NOTE: The transmission will remain in the
manually selected gear until Drive (D) is selected. Select Drive (D) at any time during the
manual downshifting sequence (or upshift progressively to Drive (D) using the up arrow button) and the transmission will upshift and downshift automatically.
11.18
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
8.
With the transmission in 11, 22, 33, or 44, select
the upshift (up arrow) button to manually upshift
one gear at a time until Drive (D) is selected.
The select display will show the selected gear
and the monitor display will show the gear currently engaged. From 11 at the bottom of the
Drive (D) range, the display will show 22, 33, 44,
and D5 as progressively higher gears are manually selected.
B
A
NOTE: The transmission will remain in the
manually selected gear until Drive (D) is selected. Select Drive (D) at any time during the
manual upshifting sequence and the transmission will upshift and downshift automatically.
9.
The function of the mode button may vary from
vehicle to vehicle. The label above the button
identifies the function.
10. A light in the upper right-hand corner of the
mode button illuminates when the mode function
is active.
NOTICE
To prevent transmission and axle damage, make
sure the automatic transmission is in high range
when performing an axle shift with the vehicle
moving.
11. The service display illuminates if a fault is de-
tected in the SBW system. Have a qualified technician inspect the SBW system as soon as possible.
f460513b
07/31/2015
A. Open caps and check fluid level.
B. Fill to this level.
Fig. 11.29, Hydraulic Brake Reservoir
system. Do not mix types and brands of fluid
because of possible incompatibility.
General Information
The master cylinder controls braking power to the
front and rear brakes. The Bendix Hydro-Max®
power booster is attached to the rear of the master
cylinder and is connected to the power steering system (which provides pressurized power steering
fluid). An electrically powered "reserve" pump operates if there is inadequate fluid flow from the power
steering pump to the power booster. The brake system warning light comes on if there is a problem
within the system. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop
and correct the problem before continuing operation
of the vehicle.
The hydraulic brake system includes a power
booster, master cylinder, reservoir, hydraulic lines, a
brake rotor on each wheel hub, and a brake caliper
and pad assembly at each rotor. See Fig. 11.29.
Meritor WABCO® Antilock Braking
System (ABS), Hydraulic Brake
Systems
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the fluid level in
the master cylinder reservoirs is up to the flange
that surrounds the reservoir. Use only heavyduty brake fluid, DOT 3, in the hydraulic brake
The Meritor WABCO Antilock Braking System (ABS)
is an electronic wheel speed monitoring and control
system that works with the hydraulic brake system.
ABS passively monitors vehicle wheel speed at all
times, but controls wheel speed during an emergency or reduced-traction stop. In normal braking
12. A flashing select/monitor display indicates that
the transmission (and not the SBW system) has
inhibited a selected transmission operation. See
the Allison Transmission Operator’s Manual for
more information.
Hydraulic Brake System
11.19
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
applications, the standard hydraulic brake system is
in effect.
IMPORTANT: For proper ABS system operation,
do not change tire sizes. The sizes of the tires
installed during production are programmed into
the electronic control unit. Installing different
sized tires could result in inaccurate wheel
speed signals to the ECU resulting in a reduced
braking force, which could lead to longer stopping distances.
ABS includes signal-generating tone wheels and sensors located in the wheel hubs of each sensed axle.
The sensors transmit vehicle wheel speed information to an electronic control unit (located on the frontwall) which interprets these signals to calculate
wheel speed and a vehicle reference speed. If the
calculations indicate wheel lockup, the appropriate
control circuit signals the brake pressure modulator
to increase or decrease braking pressure until wheel
slip has been corrected.
The electronic control unit also has a safety circuit
that constantly monitors the wheel sensors, brake
pressure modulator, and the electrical circuitry. The
dash warning light (ABS) comes on after the ignition
is switched on. Once the vehicle moves faster than
about 4 mph (6 km/h), the warning light goes out
only if all the vehicle’s ABS components are working.
If, during vehicle operation, the safety circuit senses
a failure in any part of the ABS system (a sensor,
brake pressure modulator, wiring connection; short
circuit, etc.), the warning light (ABS) comes on and
the control circuit where the failure occurred is
switched to normal braking action. Even if the ABS
system is partially or completely inoperative, normal
braking ability is maintained. An exception would be
if the brake pressure modulator, or hydraulic fluid line
is damaged. As these components are an integral
part of the hydraulic brake system, normal braking
may be impaired or inoperative.
IMPORTANT: If any of the ABS warning lights
do not work as described above, or come on
while driving, repair the ABS system immediately to ensure full antilock braking capability.
During emergency or reduced-traction stops,
fully depress the brake pedal until the vehicle
comes to a safe stop; do not pump the brake
pedal. With the brake pedal fully depressed, the
ABS system will control all wheels to provide
steering control and a reduced braking distance.
Although the ABS system improves vehicle control
during emergency braking situations, the driver still
has the responsibility to change driving styles depending on the existing traffic and road conditions.
For example, the ABS system cannot prevent an accident if the driver is speeding or following too
closely on slippery road surfaces.
Operation
Before driving the vehicle, secure all loose items in
the vehicle so that they will not fly forward during a
full brake application. Check that the brake system
warning light is off after releasing the parking brake.
If the warning light does not go off, correct the problem before continuing operation of the vehicle.
During normal brake stops, depress the foot brake
control pedal until braking action slows down the vehicle. Increase or decrease the pressure on the
pedal so that the vehicle comes to a smooth, safe
stop. When the vehicle comes to a complete stop,
shift the transmission into park (P) on the shifter and
apply the parking brake.
NOTICE
If the vehicle is equipped with an air suspension
system, do not park the vehicle or move the vehicle with the air suspension deflated. This may
cause suspension component damage.
Auto-Apply Parking Brake Operation
Use the following instructions to operate the parking
brake:
IMPORTANT: The service brake must always be
depressed when shifting from the parking brake
(Pb) position.
• Set by pressing (Pb) on the shift selector.
• To release the parking brake, depress the ser-
vice brake and shift from the "Pb" position to
any drive gear.
• Shifting from "Pb" to a drive gear and then to
neutral (N) releases the parking brake and
places the vehicle in neutral. The "BRAKE"
warning light will flash when this procedure is
performed.
• Shifting directly from "Pb" to "N" does not re-
lease the parking brake. "Pb" must be depressed, then a drive gear must be selected to
11.20
Front-Engine Diesel Chassis
release the parking brake. The "BRAKE" warning light will flash and a chime will sound when
this procedure is performed.
11.21
12
Pre- and Post-Trip
Checklists
Pretrip and Post-Trip General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daily Pretrip Inspection and Maintenance Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weekly Post-Trip Inspection and Maintenance Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monthly Post-Trip Inspection and Maintenance Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1
12.1
12.3
12.3
Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists
Pretrip and Post-Trip General
Information
Regulations in both Canada and the United States
clearly indicate that it is the driver’s responsibility to
perform an inspection and ensure the complete roadworthiness of a vehicle before placing it into service
for the day.
IMPORTANT: The pre- and post-trip checklists,
and inspections and maintenance procedures
detailed in this chapter, are not all-inclusive.
Also refer to other component and body manufacturers’ instructions for specific inspection and
maintenance instructions.
Use the pretrip inspection checklist to ensure that
vehicle components are in good working condition
before each trip. Use the weekly and monthly posttrip inspection checklists to note any items that require attention before the next trip. A driver that is
familiar with the vehicle, and drives it regularly, can
perform the daily inspections, then add the weekly
and monthly post-trip inspections as scheduled. If the
driver does not operate the vehicle on a consistent
basis, all three of the inspection procedures should
be performed before the trip.
Pre- and post-trip inspections cannot be done
quickly. However, careful inspections save time by
eliminating stops later to adjust items overlooked or
forgotten.
Numbers in parentheses within each of the checklists
reference the corresponding detailed instructions
found under "Daily (D), Weekly (W), or Monthly (M)
Procedures" in Chapter 13.
If any system or component does not pass this inspection, it must be corrected before operating the
vehicle. Whenever equipment requires adjustment,
replacement, repair, addition of lubricants, or a
change of lubricants, take the vehicle to an authorized Freightliner dealer for assistance.
Daily Pretrip Inspection and
Maintenance Checklist
IMPORTANT: Before performing any of these
checks, apply the parking brake and chock the
tires.
12.1
For the daily pretrip inspection and maintenance
checklist see Table 12.1.
Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists
Procedure Performed
(check off)
_______
Check
Inspect
Check
Check
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Check
Check
Check
Check
Inspect
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Inspect
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Check
Check
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
_______
Check
_______
Check
_______
_______
Daily Pretrip Inspections/Checks
Drain manually drained air reservoirs (that are not equipped with automatic drain
valves)
windshield washer reservoir fluid
wheel seal and hub cap (for leakage)
surge tank coolant level
radiator and charge air cooler
engine and chassis wiring
air intake system
intake-air restriction indicator mounted on air intake
engine oil level
power steering fluid level
fuel tank(s), fuel lines, and connections
fuel level
fuel/water separator
front and rear suspension components
headlights, mirrors, and window glass, and windshield wipers
doors (open without difficulty and close securely)
Adjust driver’s seat, then align rearview and downview mirrors
dash-mounted intake-air restriction indicator
oil- and air-pressure warning systems
instrument panel warning lights
ICU fault codes (front-engine diesel chassis)
horn, windshield wipers, and windshield washer
heater, defroster, and optional mirror heat controls
panel lights and interior lights
exterior lights and reflectors
tire pressure
tire condition
rims and wheels
automatic transmission fluid level
air brake chambers and pushrods
air brake lines
slack adjusters
air brake system operation
frame rails (missing bolts), crossmembers (bent or loose)
Bendix Hydro-Max® brake booster (front-engine diesel chassis)
mud flaps (aren’t damaged, at least 10 inches above the ground, and brackets
are secure)
exhaust system (mounted securely, connected tightly, no signs of leaks such as
soot trails)
Remove chocks and test service brakes
Inspector___________________________________________________
Procedure
Reference
D1
D2
–
D3
D4
D5
D6
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
–
–
D6
D14
D15
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
D25
D26
–
D27
–
–
D28
Date ________________
Table 12.1, Daily Pretrip Inspection and Maintenance Checklist
12.2
Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists
Weekly Post-Trip Inspection
and Maintenance Checklist
For the weekly post-trip inspection and maintenance
checklist see Table 12.2.
Before performing any of these checks, apply
the parking brake and chock the tires.
Procedure Performed
(check off)
_______
Inspect
_______
Check
_______
Inspect
_______
Check
_______
Weekly Post-Trip Inspections/Checks
Manually drain air reservoirs that are equipped with automatic drain valves
batteries and battery cables
wheel bearing lubricant level
steering components
drive belt condition
Inspector___________________________________________________
Procedure
Reference
—
W1
W2
W3
W4
Date ________________
Table 12.2, Weekly Post-Trip Inspection and Maintenance Checklist
Monthly Post-Trip Inspection
and Maintenance Checklist
For the monthly post-trip inspection and maintenance
checklist see Table 12.3.
Before performing any of these checks, apply
the parking brake and chock the tires.
Procedure Performed
Monthly Post-Trip Inspections/Checks
(check off)
_______ Clean the battery terminals
Inspect
_______ radiator hoses and heater hoses
fluid level in the hydraulic clutch reservoir (if applicable, and if necessary, fill with
Check
_______
DOT 3 brake fluid)
Check
_______ steering wheel play
Check
_______ outer surfaces of the body (for visible surface breaks and damage)
Check
_______ hood tilt damper (attached at both ends)
Inspect
_______ brake lining wear
Inspect
_______ driveshaft
Inspect
_______ (and lubricate if needed) Meritor Roller Pins; inspect the brake shoes
Inspector___________________________________________________
Date ________________
Table 12.3, Monthly Post-Trip Inspection and Maintenance Checklist
12.3
Procedure
Reference
M1
M2
—
M3
—
—
M4
—
M5
13
Pre- and Post-Trip
Inspections and
Maintenance
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Daily Pretrip Inspection and Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Weekly Post-Trip Inspection and Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.12
Monthly Post-Trip Inspection and Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.13
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
Safety Precautions
1.3
Water and oil emulsion often form pockets
that will not drain while compressed air is
in the reservoirs. Because of these pockets, leave the valves blocked open during
the first part of the pretrip inspection.
1.4
If the drained water is cloudy or oily, it
may indicate a problem with the compressor. If oil is allowed to contaminate the air
dryer, it will not remove the water from the
air brake system, which could adversely
affect braking.
DANGER
When working on the vehicle, shut down the engine, set the parking brake, and chock the tires.
Before working under the vehicle, always place
jack stands under the frame rails to ensure the
vehicle can not drop. Failure to follow these
steps could result in serious personal injury or
death.
Daily Pretrip Inspection and
Maintenance Procedures
2.
Check the fluid level in the windshield washer
reservoir.
Add washer fluid as needed.
Whenever equipment requires adjustment, replacement, and/or repair, take your vehicle to an authorized Freightliner dealer for assistance.
1.
Drain manually drained brake system air reservoirs.
Water and oil normally enter the air reservoir in
the form of vapor because of the heat generated
during compression. After the water and oil condense, drain the resulting emulsion as follows:
1.1
Open the wet tank valve. The drain cock
or lanyard is located on the forward end of
the supply air reservoir, which is connected directly to the air compressor.
Block the valve open.
WARNING
WARNING
Washer fluids may be flammable and poisonous.
Do not expose washer fluid to an open flame or
any burning material, such as a cigarette. Always
comply with the washer fluid manufacturer’s recommended safety precautions.
3.
Check the coolant level in the surge tank.
See Fig. 13.1. If the coolant is low, add a 50/50
mixture of water and antifreeze. Refer to the engine manufacturer’s service literature for approved coolants. Fill the surge tank with coolant
to the MAX line when the tank is cool. If the
surge tank was empty, start the engine after refilling and check the level again when the engine
is at operating temperature.
When draining the air reservoir, do not look into
the air jets or direct them towards anyone. Dirt or
sludge particles may be in the air stream and
could cause injury.
Failure to drain the air reservoirs as instructed
could cause sludge formation in the air brake
system. Sludge could adversely affect braking,
causing loss of control, which could cause death,
personal injury, or property damage.
1.2
Exhaust the remaining air and moisture
from the system by opening the drain
cocks on the bottoms of the remaining air
reservoirs, or pull the lanyard(s) until the
air is exhausted.
05/31/2007
f200705
Fig. 13.1, Surge Tank Fill Cap
13.1
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
in Table 13.1, replace the air cleaner element. Take the vehicle to an authorized
Freightliner dealer for assistance.
NOTICE
Coolant must be filled to the full line of the surge
tank. Low coolant could result in engine overheating, which could cause engine damage.
4.
4.1
4.2
Inspect the radiator and charge air cooler
for damage and accumulated debris.
Straighten bent or damaged fins to permit
airflow across all areas of the cores.
4.3
Also inspect and clean the condenser. If
clogged, the condenser can restrict airflow
through the radiator.
4.4
Check the radiator for leaks. If leaks are
found, have the radiator repaired or replaced. Take the vehicle to an authorized
Freightliner dealer for assistance.
05/22/97
Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values (inH2O)
EPA07 and
GHG14 and
Engine Make
EPA10 Engines GHG17 Engines
Cummins
25
25
Detroit
22
18
Table 13.1, Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values
NOTE: After replacing the filter element,
reset the restriction indicator by pressing the
rubber reset button.
Inspect the air intake system for leaks or damage.
NOTICE
Failure to maintain a sealed air intake system
could allow the entry of dirt and contaminants
into the engine. This could adversely affect engine performance and result in engine damage.
6.2
Check the intake-air restriction indicator to
determine if the air cleaner needs to be
changed. See Fig. 13.2.
f090176
Fig. 13.2, Air Restriction Indicator
Inspect the engine and chassis wiring.
6.1
H20 VACUUM
PUSH TO RESET
Check for loose wiring, chafed insulation, and
damaged or loose hold-down clamps. Tighten
loose wires or hold-down clamps; replace damaged wiring or clamps.
6.
IN
25
20
15
10
7
Inspect the radiator and charge air cooler
for clogged fins. Use compressed air or
water directed from the fan side of the
core to backflush any material restricting
airflow.
NOTE: When traveling through areas of high
insect concentration, it may be necessary to
clean the exterior of the radiator or the
charge air cooler core as often as every 200
miles (320 km).
5.
H20 VACUUM
Inspect the radiator and charge air cooler.
7.
6.3
Inspect the air cleaner, and replace it
when it becomes clogged or dirty.
6.4
Check the engine air intake piping from
the air cleaner to the engine intake. Inspect the piping for loose connections,
cracks, torn or collapsed hoses, punctures, and other damage. Tighten loose
connections, and have damaged components replaced. Make sure the piping system is airtight so that all intake air passes
through the air cleaner. Engine damage
can occur if the air intake system is not
properly maintained.
Check the engine oil level.
If the yellow signal stays locked in the red
zone once the engine is shut down, or is
at or above the maximum restriction value
13.2
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
NOTICE
Operating the engine with the oil level below the
minimum fill (or "add") mark or above the maximum fill (or "full") mark could result in engine
damage.
7.1
MAX
Min
Park the vehicle on a level surface. Allow
several minutes for the oil to drain back
into the oil pan to ensure an accurate
reading.
NOTE: Follow the engine manufacturer’s
guidelines for engine shutdown time requirements prior to checking the oil level.
7.2
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a
paper towel or cloth, then push the dipstick back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the oil
level.
7.3
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area,
or the add mark, at the tip of the dipstick,
add at least one quart (liter) of the recommended oil. See Fig. 13.3.
For diesel engines that comply with
EPA07 or newer regulations, use CJ-4
engine oil with less than 1% sulfated ash.
FULL
f012203
Fig. 13.3, Oil Dipstick
NOTICE
Failure to use the recommended oil can result in
engine or aftertreatment component damage and
will void the warranty.
8.
Check the fluid level in the steering system hydraulic fluid reservoir. See Fig. 13.4.
If needed, fill the reservoir to a level between the
MIN and MAX marks. Use only Dexron® III ATF,
or an equivalent.
IMPORTANT: Do not confuse coolant with hydraulic fluid. Both are pink in color.
9.
13.3
Fig. 13.4, Steering System Hydraulic Fluid Reservoir
Replace leaking fuel tanks; repair or replace any
mechanisms, lines, or connections that are leaking. Take the vehicle to an authorized Freightliner
dealer for assistance.
10. Check the fuel level in the fuel tank(s). To keep
condensation to a minimum, fuel tanks should be
filled at the end of each day. Federal regulations
prohibit filling a fuel tank to more than 95 percent
of its liquid capacity. Select the proper grade of
fuel as specified by the engine manufacturer.
WARNING
ADD 2 QT
10/26/2012
f461177
04/10/97
Inspect the fuel tanks, fuel lines, and connections
for leaks.
Never fill fuel tanks to more than 95 percent of
their liquid capacity. This could make them more
likely to rupture from impact possibly causing
fire and resulting in serious personal injury and
death by burning. Do not mix gasoline or alcohol
with diesel fuel. This mixture could cause an explosion, possibly resulting in serious personal
injury or death. Do not fill the fuel tanks in the
presence of sparks, open flames, or intense heat.
These could ignite the fuel, possibly causing severe burns.
IMPORTANT: Use ultralow-sulfur diesel (ULSD)
fuel with 15 ppm sulfur content or less, based
on ASTM D2622 test procedure. Failure to use
ultralow-sulfur diesel fuels may void the warranty on emission components.
NOTICE
Water in the fuel/water separator will appear as
beads. With the engine off, drain the separator
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
only enough to remove the water; about two teaspoons at a time. Do not drain the separator
completely or it will be necessary to prime the
fuel system before the vehicle may be started
again.
11. Check the fuel/water separator and drain any
water present.
NOTE: The fuel/water separator may be relocated by the body manufacturer and the
locations may vary.
11.1
Shut off the engine.
11.2
Remove the fuel cap.
11.3
Open the valve until draining occurs. Drain
the filter sump of water until clear fuel is
visible.
11.4
Close the drain and install the fuel cap.
11.5
Run the engine and check for leaks.
13. Clean the windshield, side, and rear windows
with a long-handled or telescoping window cleaning device and standard cleaning solutions.
Stand only on the ground, on a stepladder, or an
elevated walkway. The vehicle entry/exit steps
and handholds are not designed for this purpose.
The tires, fenders, engine, and other under-hood
components do not have adequate gripping surfaces and handholds.
Check the condition of the windshield wiper arms
and blades.
Be sure the windshield wiper blades are tensioned against the windshield.
Inspect the wiper blades for damage and deteriorated rubber.
Replace the wiper arms if the wiper blades are
not tensioned against the windshield.
Replace damaged or deteriorated wiper blades.
WARNING
12. Inspect the front and rear suspension compo-
nents, including springs, spring hangers, shocks,
and suspension brackets.
12.1
Check for broken spring leaves, loose
U-bolts, cracks in the suspension
brackets, and loose fasteners in the spring
hangers and shackles.
12.2
Inspect the shock absorbers for loose fasteners and leaks.
12.3
Tighten all loose fasteners and have any
components replaced that are worn,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
12.4
On vehicles with air suspensions, check
for leaks. Check air suspension components for cuts and bulges.
WARNING
Do not replace individual leaves of a damaged
front or rear suspension leaf spring assembly;
replace the complete spring assembly. Visible
damage, such as cracks or breaks, to one leaf
causes hidden damage to other leaves. Replacement of only the visibly damaged part(s) is no
assurance that the spring is safe. If cracks or
breaks exist on front spring assemblies in either
of the two top leaves, a loss of vehicle control
could occur. Failure to replace a damaged spring
assembly could cause an accident resulting in
serious personal injury or property damage.
When cleaning windshields and windows, always
stand on the ground or on a secure ladder or
platform. Use a long-handled window cleaner. Do
not use the cab steps, tires, fenders, fuel tanks,
engine, or under-hood components to access the
windshield or windows. Doing so could cause a
fall and result in an injury.
Replace wiper arms and blades when necessary
to maintain good visibility. Poor visibility could
interfere with the driver’s ability to control the
vehicle, possibly resulting in serious personal
injury or death.
14. Check the oil- and air-pressure warning systems.
When the engine is started, oil- and air-pressure
warnings will come on until the oil and air pressure rise above a preset minimum. After starting
the engine, make sure the oil- and air-pressure
warning systems are operating and that the
buzzer stops sounding when the preset minimum
is reached.
14.1
If the warning systems do not come on
when the ignition is turned on, have the
systems repaired.
14.2
If the air pressure in both systems is
above the preset minimum when the engine is started, test the low air pressure
warning system by repeatedly pumping
13.4
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
the brake pedal to lower the pressure to
below this range, or until the warning system comes on.
NOTE: The air pressure in both the primary
and secondary air reservoir systems must
be above 65 psi (448 kPa) on most vehicles.
15. Check the instrument panel warning lights. Dur-
ing the ignition sequence, if any warning lights
remain on, see Chapter 5 for detailed instructions on warning lights.
For Front-Engine Diesel Chassis, check the instrumentation control unit (ICU) for fault codes.
During the ignition sequence, if an active fault is
detected in any device that is connected to the
datalink, the message display screen will show
the active fault codes, one after the other until
the parking brake is released or the ignition
switch is turned off. See Chapter 11 for detailed
operating instructions for the ICU.
16. Make sure that the horn, windshield wipers, and
windshield washers are operating properly.
These devices must be in good working order for
safe vehicle operation.
16.1
16.2
Make sure that the horn works. If a horn is
not working, have it repaired before trip
departure.
Check the wiper and washer control on
the multifunction turn signal switch. If the
wipers and/or washers are not working,
have them repaired before trip departure.
17. During cold weather; make sure the heater, de-
froster, and optional mirror heat controls are operating properly. If so equipped, turn on the mirror heat switch and make sure the system is
working.
18. Check the operation of all the panel lights and
interior lights.
Turn on the headlights, dash lights, and four-way
flashers and leave them on. If any of the gauge
bulbs, the dome light bulbs, or the right- and leftturn indicator bulbs are not working, replace
them.
19. Make sure all the exterior lights are working
properly. Check that all the lights and reflectors
are clean.
19.1
Check that the brake lights, taillights,
headlights, parking lights, turn signals,
road lights (if so equipped), and front
clearance lights are working properly and
are clean.
19.2
Test the high and low beams of the headlights.
19.3
Replace the light bulbs or sealed beam
units that are not working. Refer to the
body builder book for light bulb replacement.
20. Check the tire inflation pressures, and inspect
each tire for bulges, cracks, cuts, and punctures.
IMPORTANT: The load and cold inflation
pressure must not exceed the wheel manufacturer’s recommendations, even though
the tire may be approved for a higher load
or inflation. Some wheels are stamped with
a maximum load and maximum cold inflation
rating. If the load exceeds the maximum
wheel capacity, the load must be adjusted or
reduced. See and adhere to the tire load
and cold inflation pressure specifications
stated on the vehicle specification label.
NOTE: Tire load limits refer only to individual
tires and do not indicate the weights for the
entire axle.
20.1
Check the inflation pressures of the tires
before each trip, using an accurate tire
pressure gauge. See Fig. 13.5. Check tire
pressures when the tires are cool. The
maximum inflation pressure for each tire is
provided on the outer wall of the tire. Inflate the tires to the applicable pressures,
if needed. Be sure that valve stem caps
are used on every tire, and that they are
screwed on finger-tight.
See either the Michelin Recreational Vehicle Tire Guide or Goodyear Service
Manual for correct tire inflation pressures
for the vehicle load.
Overinflation gives the treaded surface of
the tire a convex shape. See Fig. 13.6.
This causes premature tire wear in the
middle part of the tire since this section is
primarily in contact with the road.
Underinflation gives the tread surface a
concave shape. See Fig. 13.6. This
causes excessive tire wear on the outer
13.5
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
edges of the tire since those edges are
primarily in contact with the road.
IMPORTANT: Low-rolling resistance (LRR)
tires minimize wasted energy as a tire rolls,
thereby decreasing rolling effort and improving fuel efficiency. If tire replacement is necessary, replacement tires must meet or exceed the rolling resistance of the originally
installed tires in order to maintain compliance with greenhouse gas and fuel efficiency regulations (GHG14).
Contact your tire manufacturer/supplier to
determine the rolling resistance of the originally installed tires. Visit www.epa.gov/
smartway for additional information and resources.
20.3
f400061
11/03/94
Fig. 13.5, Checking Tire Pressures
Inspect the tires for bulges, cracks, cuts,
or penetrations. A tire pressure check will
assist in uncovering hidden damage; a
weekly pressure loss of 4 psi (28 kPa) or
more in a tire may indicate damage, and
the tire should be inspected and repaired
or replaced.
IMPORTANT: Only use temporary resealing
or reinflation products that are water soluble
and state that they do not adversely affect
the operation of the tire pressure sensor(s),
if so equipped.
A
B
C
11/03/94
f400062a
A. Tire correctly inflated
B. Tire overinflated
20.4
C. Tire underinflated
Fig. 13.6, Checking Tire Inflation
Government regulations require the removal of front axle tires at 4/32-inch (3mm) remaining tread depth and rear axle
tires at 2/32-inch (1.5-mm) remaining
tread depth.
WARNING
Do not operate the vehicle with underinflated or
overinflated tires. Incorrect inflation can stress
the tires and make the tires and rims more susceptible to damage, possibly leading to rim or
tire failure and loss of vehicle control, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
20.2
If a tire has been run flat or underinflated,
before adding air, check for possible
wheel or tire damage.
IMPORTANT: Moisture inside a tire can result in body ply separation or a sidewall rupture. During tire inflation, compressed air
reservoirs and lines must be kept dry. Service inline moisture traps regularly.
If the tires are wearing irregularly, see the
tire manufacturer’s recommendations.
Have the front axle alignment checked to
determine the cause of irregular tire wear.
20.5
Inspect the tires for oil contamination.
Fuel, oil, gasoline, and other petroleum
derivatives, if allowed to contact the tires,
will soften the rubber and destroy the tire.
IMPORTANT: Do not use tire dressings.
These will cause premature wear and deterioration of the tire material. Use only soap
and water to clean tires.
WARNING
On vehicles equipped with ZF independent front
suspension (IFS) and ZF SB 7000 front air disc
13.6
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
brakes, the only approved front wheels and valve
stems are those that come on the chassis as delivered from the FCCC manufacturing plant.
These wheels have a special bolt pattern. Valve
stems other than those delivered with the chassis may interfere with the brake calipers. The use
of unapproved front wheels and/or front wheel
valve stems could cause component damage and
result in personal injury or death, or property
damage.
2
1
3
21. Check the wheel nuts for indications of loose-
ness. Examine each wheel component.
Check the wheel nuts for indications of looseness. Remove all dirt and foreign material from
the assembly. Dirt or rust streaks from the stud
holes, metal buildup around stud holes, or out-ofround or worn stud holes may be caused by
loose wheel nuts. Tighten the wheel nuts to the
correct torque specifications in the proper tightening sequences. See Group 40 of the Recreational Vehicle Chassis Maintenance Manual for
instructions.
Examine the wheel assembly components (including studs and nuts) for cracks or other damage.
1. Coolant Reservoir
2. Transmission Fluid Dipstick
3. Hydraulic Reservoir
Fig. 13.7, Transmission Fluid Level Check
22.3
Wipe the dipstick clean and check the
fluid level. A safe operating level is any
level within the HOT run (upper) band on
the dipstick. See Fig. 13.9.
22.4
If the fluid is not within this range, add or
drain fluid as needed to bring the level to
the top of the HOT run band. See
Table 13.2 for fluid types and capacities.
WARNING
Have any worn or damaged wheel components
replaced by a qualified person using the wheel
manufacturer’s instructions and the wheel industry’s standard safety precautions and equipment.
Otherwise a vehicle or workshop accident could
occur, possibly resulting in serious personal injury or death.
22. Check the fluid level in the automatic transmis-
sion. See Fig. 13.7 and Fig. 13.8.
NOTE: The automatic transmission fluid
must be warm to ensure an accurate check.
The fluid level rises as temperature increases. Check the transmission fluid with
the vehicle on a level surface.
13.7
f350162a
01/28/2002
Transmission Lubricant Capacities
Series
Refill Capacity*†
1000, 2000
16.0 (15.1)
3000, 4000 MH
17.5 (16.5)
* Quantities listed are approximate. Add the recommended amount of
fluid as listed under refill capacity, then perform a "hot check" and add
fluid as needed. Do not overfill.
† Some Allison 3000 MH transmissions have a deeper oil sump than
other models. These models require 3 additional quarts (2.8 L) of automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
Table 13.2, Transmission Lubricant Capacities
IMPORTANT: For all transmissions, use
TranSynd synthetic automatic transmission
fluid (ATF).
22.1
Operate the transmission in a Drive (D)
range until normal operating temperature,
160 to 200°F (71 to 93°C), is reached.
NOTE: A cold check may be made when the
sump temperature is 60 to 104°F (15 to
40°C). Follow the substeps below.
22.2
Park the vehicle. Set the parking brake,
and place the transmission in the Neutral
(N) position. Let the engine run at idle.
22.5
Run the engine for at least one minute to
clear the fluid system of air.
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
10/31/2005
f544667
1. Coolant Reservoir
2. Engine Oil Fill
3. Engine Oil Dipstick
4. Transmission Fluid Dipstick
5. Hydraulic Fluid Reservoir
Fig. 13.8, Transmission Fluid Level Check (front-engine diesel chassis)
level is not within the COLD run band, add
or drain fluid until it reaches the middle of
the COLD run band.
B
22.7
A
Perform a hot check at the first opportunity after normal operating temperature,
160 to 200°F (71 to 93°C), is reached.
23. Inspect the air brake components including the
f270002a
12/01/97
A. Cold Run Band
B. Hot Run Band
Fig. 13.9, Automatic Transmission Dipstick Markings
22.6
With the engine running, wipe the dipstick
clean and check the fluid level. Any level
within the COLD run (lower) band is satisfactory for operating the vehicle. If the
brake chamber pushrod, air reservoirs, and air
lines.
Inspect the front air brake lines for leaks at the
fitting where they enter the air chamber.
With an assistant at the front wheels to inspect
the brake lines, turn the wheels to full lock in one
direction. While holding the service brake pedal
down, inspect the front brake air lines closely
where they enter the air chambers.
13.8
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
Turn the wheels to full lock in the other direction,
hold the service brake pedal down, and repeat
the inspection.
1
If there is a leak, the hose should be replaced.
Take your vehicle to an authorized Freightliner
dealer for assistance.
2
3
Look for worn clevis pins on brake chamber
pushrods and missing or damaged cotter pins on
the brake chamber pushrods clevis pins. Replace
worn clevis pins and install new cotter pins if
necessary.
Visually inspect the piston rod engagement with
the clevis. At least 7 threads of engagement are
required; there should be 1 inch (25 mm) of
clearance from the centerline of the clevis pin
hole to the end of the piston rod. See Fig. 13.10.
Take your vehicle to an authorized Freightliner
dealer for assistance.
See if the chamber piston rod is in line with the
slack adjuster. Misalignment can cause the piston rod to rub on the non-pressure chamber and
cause a dragging brake. Take your vehicle to an
authorized Freightliner dealer for assistance.
Visually inspect the exterior surfaces of the
chamber for damage. Make sure that breather
holes in the non-pressure section(s) are open
and free of debris. Take your vehicle to an authorized Freightliner dealer for assistance.
B
A
5
08/20/93
23.2
Check the clearance between the hoses,
exhaust manifold, and turbocharger, or
other hot spots. Excessive heat will cause
the material in the hoses to deteriorate
rapidly or become brittle. Provide at least
6 inches (152 mm) of clearance. More
clearance is recommended if the hose is
located above the heat source.
Check for kinks, dents, or swelling of the
hoses. If a hose is damaged, replace it
with the same size and type.
Do not route the hose on top of anything
likely to be stepped on or walked on.
23.3
13.9
Check for damage to hoses located near
moving parts, such as drivelines, suspensions, and axles. If the moving parts are
catching or pinching the lines, correct as
needed.
f420225a
A. Minimum of 1-inch (25-mm) clearance between
centerline of clevis pin hole and piston rod end.
B. Minimum of 7 threads engagement.
4. Cotter Pin
1. Piston Rod
2. Piston Rod Nut
5. Clevis Pin
3. Clevis
Fig. 13.10, Piston Rod Engagement With the Clevis
23.4
Check for hose damage caused by abrasion. If a hose is abraded, replace it.
Check for the cause of abrasion, such as
loose or damaged hose clamps. Repair or
replace the clamps as needed.
23.5
Observe the hose cover condition, especially hoses exposed to water splash and
ice. If any hose is dried out or ragged (the
wire or liner is showing through the cover),
replace the hose.
23.6
Inspect air tubing, especially tubing made
of nylon. In cold weather, nylon tubing is
sensitive to damage, such as nicks or
cuts. Replace nicked or cut tubing, even if
it is not leaking.
23.7
Check the bend radii of all hoses. See
Fig. 13.11. The minimum bend radius of a
hose is that bend which the hose will withstand without experiencing damaging
stresses or kinking. For minimum bend
radius values, take your vehicle to an authorized Freightliner dealer for assistance.
Inspect the air lines as follows.
23.1
4
When a rubber hose bend does not meet
minimum radius requirements, the outside
may appear smooth even if the inner tube
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
is kinked. Reroute the hose or replace it
with one of adequate length if the bend
radius is not within minimum
specifications.
11/03/94
A
24.3
Check for damage to hoses located near
moving parts, such as drivelines, kingpins,
suspensions, and axles. If moving parts
are catching or pinching the lines, correct
as needed.
24.4
Check for hose damage caused by abrasion. If abraded, have the hose replaced.
Check for the cause of abrasion, such as
loose or damaged hose clamps. Have the
clamps repaired or replaced as needed.
24.5
Observe the hose cover condition, especially hoses exposed to water splash and
ice. If dried out or ragged (the wire is
showing through the cover), have the
hose(s) replaced.
24.6
Inspect the air tubing, especially tubing
made of nylon. In cold weather, nylon tubing is sensitive to damage, such as nicks
or cuts. Have nicked or cut tubing replaced, even if it is not leaking.
f420329a
NOTE: Center of the hose bend radius should be well
away from the fitting.
A. Bend Radius
Fig. 13.11, Bend Radius
23.8
23.9
Check straight hose installations (those
hoses that do not bend along their routing). Pressure changes can cause a hose
to lengthen up to 2 percent, or shorten up
to 4 percent. A 100-inch (2540-mm) length
of hose, for example, can contract to 96
inches (2440 mm). If the hose has no
slack when it is exhausted of air, replace it
with one of adequate length to avoid a
possible blow-off from the fitting during
vehicle operation.
Check for kinked or twisted hoses. A 7
percent twist in the hose can reduce its
life by up to 90 percent. Also, a twisted
hose under pressure tends to untwist. This
could cause it to loosen the fitting. Reconnect hoses that are twisted.
24. Inspect the air brake lines.
24.1
24.2
Check the clearance between the hoses
and the exhaust manifold or other hot
spots. Excessive heat will cause material
in hoses to deteriorate rapidly or become
brittle. Provide at least 6 inches (152 mm)
of clearance. More clearance is recommended if the hose is located above the
heat source.
Check for kinks, dents, or swelling of the
hoses. If damaged, have the hose replaced with the same size and type.
NOTE: Do not route the hose on top of anything likely to be stepped on.
NOTE: The front brake lines flex continuously in vehicle operation, so they require
special examination. Give particular attention
to the areas near where they connect to the
front air brake chambers.
24.7
This inspection requires two people, one
in the driver’s seat, and another to inspect
the brake line connections at the wheels.
Both wheel air lines must be inspected
with the emergency brake set, engine
idling, air pressure at 80 to 90 psi (550 to
620 kPa), and the brake pedal held down.
24.8
Turn the wheels to full lock in one direction and inspect both air lines where they
connect to the air chambers, then turn the
wheels to full lock in the other direction
and inspect both lines. If a hose is leaking, have it replaced.
IMPORTANT: ABS-equipped vehicles operating in regions where especially corrosive ice
removal chemicals are used may experience
higher than normal rotor corrosion. Tone
rings should be routinely inspected for corrosion. Severe corrosion of the integral ABS
tone ring may cause the ABS warning lamp
in the dash to illuminate due to false wheel
speed readings. If the ABS warning lamp
illuminates at any time other than at vehicle
13.10
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
start-up, have the problem repaired immediately.
the air compressor at approximately 100
psi (689 kPa). If the air governor does not
cut in and cut out as described above, it
must be adjusted to these specifications. If
the air governor cannot be adjusted or
repaired, replace it before operating the
vehicle.
25. Inspect the slack adjusters.
Inspect the slack adjuster for any signs of damage. If damaged, have the slack adjuster replaced.
Inspect the slack adjuster boot for cuts or tears.
If the boot is damaged, have it replaced. Take
your vehicle to an authorized Freightliner dealer
for assistance. See Fig. 13.12.
4
26.2
With the air system fully charged to 120
psi (827 kPa), make one full brake application and note the air pressure reading
on the gauge. Continue to reduce the air
pressure by moderate brake applications
to a maximum of 90 psi (620 kPa), then
run the engine at governed rpm. If the
time required to raise the air pressure to
120 psi (827 kPa) (from the pressure
noted after one brake application) is more
than 30 seconds, eliminate any leaks or
replace the air compressor before operating the vehicle.
5
6
7
3
2
8
9
26.3
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
f421398
7/16-inch Adjusting Nut
Grease Fitting
Boot
Link
Brake Chamber Piston Rod
Clevis
1/2-inch Clevis Pin
1/4-inch Clevis Pin
Grease Relief Opening
Slack Adjuster Spline
Fig. 13.12, Gunite Automatic Slack Adjuster
IMPORTANT: Brake checking and adjusting is
necessary for all vehicles, including those
equipped with automatic slack adjusters.
26. Check the air brake system for proper operation.
26.1
Check the air governor cut-in and cut-out
pressures as follows:
Run the engine at fast idle. The air governor should cut out the air compressor at
approximately 120 psi (827 kPa). With the
engine idling, apply the brake pedal several times. The air governor should cut in
13.11
Check the air pressure reserve as follows:
With the air system fully charged to 120
psi (827 kPa), stop the engine and note
the air pressure. Then make one full brake
application and observe the pressure
drop. If it drops more than 25 psi (172
kPa), all areas of leakage must be eliminated before operating the vehicle.
10
06/17/2003
Check the air pressure buildup time as
follows:
26.4
Check the air leakage in the system as
follows:
With the parking brake (spring brake) applied, the transmission out of gear, and
the tires chocked, charge the air system
until cut-out pressure of 120 psi (827 kPa)
is reached.
With the service brakes released, shut
down the engine, wait one minute and
note the air pressure gauge reading. Observe the air pressure drop in psi (kPa)
per minute.
Charge the air system until cut-out pressure of 120 psi (827 kPa) is reached. With
the parking brakes released and the service brake applied, shut down the engine,
wait one minute and note the air pressure
gauge reading. Observe the air pressure
drop in psi (kPa) per minute.
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
If leakage exceeds the limits shown in
Table 13.3, repair all areas of leakage before driving the vehicle.
electric grease to the posts and terminals to help
retard corrosion.
2.
Maximum Air Leakage Per Minute
Brakes Released
Brakes Applied
2 psi (14 kPa)
3 psi (21 kPa)
If needed, fill the hubs to the level indicated on
the hub cap. See Chapter 18 for recommended
lubricants.
Table 13.3, Maximum Allowable Service Brake
Leakage
27. Check the operation of the Bendix Hydro-Max®
brake booster, as follows.
27.1
With the ignition off, depress the brake
pedal and listen for the back-up motor to
engage. The operator should also feel the
pedal force relieve and the pedal should
depress easily.
27.2
With the engine running, and the parking
brake released; operator is to ensure that
the BRAKE warning indicator light is not
on. This is a dual indicator, and indicates
that the parking brake is set, and warns if
there is a Hydro-Max failure condition
other than loss of back-up motor power.
Check the level of the wheel bearing lubricant in
the hub cap at each end of the front axle. See
Fig. 13.13.
IMPORTANT: Before removing the fill plug, always clean the hub cap and plug.
3.
Examine the steering components.
See Fig. 13.14. If repairs are needed, take your
vehicle to an authorized Freightliner dealer for
assistance.
2
28. Test the service brakes.
1
When starting to move the vehicle and before
picking up speed, test the brakes with the foot
pedal and parking brake control valve (yellow
knob) to be sure they will bring the vehicle to a
safe stop.
Weekly Post-Trip Inspection
and Maintenance Procedures
1.
A
A. Hub Cavity Full
1. Fill Plug/Magnetic Drain
2. Drain Plug
Inspect the batteries and battery cables.
Fig. 13.13, Oil-Filled Hub Cap
Access the batteries. Be sure the battery holddown is secure. If it is loose, tighten the holddown bolts; if it is broken, replace it.
Remove any corrosion from the hold-down and
the top of the battery. Use diluted ammonia or a
soda solution to neutralize the acid present, then
rinse off the ammonia or soda solution with clean
water.
If the battery posts or cable terminals are corroded, disconnect the terminals from the posts.
Clean them with a soda solution and a wire
brush. After cleaning, connect the terminals to
the battery posts, then apply a thin coat of di-
f330247b
07/09/2009
4.
3.1
Check the mounting bolts and pitman arm
nut, for tightness.
3.2
Check the drag link nuts for missing cotter
pins.
3.3
Inspect the steering drive shaft and steering linkage for excessive looseness, or
other damage.
3.4
Tighten loose nuts and have damaged
parts replaced as needed.
Check the condition of the drive belt.
13.12
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
apply a thin coat of petroleum jelly to the
posts and terminals to help retard corrosion.
WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. To prevent possible personal injury, always wash your hands after handling battery parts and related accessories.
1
2
2.
11/15/2000
f461825
Inspect the radiator and heater hoses, including
the clamps and support brackets.
2.1
Make sure the radiator inlet and outlet
hoses are pliable and are not cracking or
ballooning. Replace hoses that show signs
of cracking, weakening, or ballooning.
2.2
Make sure the heater hoses are pliable
and are not cracking or ballooning. Replace hoses that show signs of cracking,
weakening, or ballooning.
2.3
Tighten the hose clamps as necessary,
but do not overtighten, as hose life can be
adversely affected.
2.4
Be sure the hose support brackets are
securely fastened. Make sure the hoses
are not located near sources of wear,
abrasion, or high heat.
1. Steering Gear Mounting Bolt Location
2. Pitman Arm Pinch Bolt Nut
Fig. 13.14, TRW Steering Gear Installation
Look for signs of wear (frayed edges) and damage (breaks or cracks). If a belt is worn or damaged, have the belt replaced. Take your vehicle
to an authorized Freightliner dealer for assistance.
Monthly Post-Trip Inspection
and Maintenance Procedures
1.
IMPORTANT: Replace all hoses, including
heater hoses, at the same time. Service-type
knitted or braided yarn-reinforced neoprene
hose is acceptable. Silicone hoses having
an extended service life can be substituted
for the reinforced neoprene type. Contact
your local Freightliner dealer for assistance.
Clean the batteries.
1.1
Remove any corrosion from the hold-down
and the top of the battery. Use a soda solution to neutralize the acid present, then
rinse off the soda solution with clean
water.
NOTICE
Take care to keep the vent plugs tight so that the
neutralizing solution does not enter any of the
battery cells and damage the battery.
1.2
13.13
If the battery posts or cable terminals are
corroded, disconnect the terminals from
the posts. Clean them with a soda solution
and a wire brush. After cleaning, connect
the terminals to the battery posts, then
3.
Check the steering wheel for excessive play. See
Fig. 13.15.
3.1
With the front tires straight ahead, turn the
steering wheel until motion is observed at
the front wheels. Hold the steering wheel
in this position.
3.2
Align a reference mark on a ruler, then
slowly turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction until motion is again detected
at the wheels.
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
5.1
Check the anchor pins, rollers and bushing for lubricant and excessive debris.
5.2
If the parts are damaged in any way, replace them.
5.3
While the brake is disassembled during
inspection, apply anchor pin grease with
Bentone thickeners, NLGI grade 1, Meritor
specification 0-616-A, 0-617-B or equivalent. See Fig. 13.16 for brake lubrication
areas.
A
B
10/10/95
f461057
A. Lash Area
A
Fig. 13.15, Measuring Lash at the Steering Wheel
3.3
Determine the lash (free play) at the rim of
the steering wheel. Excessive lash exists
if steering wheel movement exceeds 2-1/4
inches (57 mm) with an 18 inch (450 mm)
steering wheel.
See local/federal regulations for acceptable ranges of lash.
4.
5.
Check the brake lining wear on all vehicles, including those with automatic slack adjusters.
Proper brake operation is dependent on periodic
maintenance and inspection of the brake linings.
4.1
Check that brake linings are free of oil and
grease.
4.2
Inspect the thickness of the brake linings.
If the axle assembly is equipped with a
dust shield or backing plate, remove the
inspection plugs. If any brake linings are
worn to less than approximately 1/4 inch
(6.4 mm) at the thinnest point, have the
linings replaced on all brake assemblies
on that axle. Take your vehicle to an authorized Freightliner dealer for assistance.
4.3
Check the brake drums for wear and
cracks.
4.4
Check that the inspection plugs in the dust
shields or backing plates, if so equipped,
are installed.
C
07/11/2008
B
f430499
A. Anchor Pins — lubricate grease fittings.
B. Shoe Rollers— lubricate where pins touch the brake
shoes.
C. Bushing — lubricate grease fittings.
Fig. 13.16, Meritor Roller Pin Lubrication Areas
Inspect brake shoe components and perform
Meritor Roller Pin lubricating, if needed, as follows. See Fig. 13.16.
13.14
14
Cleaning and Care
Washing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of Chrome Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dashboard and Instrument Panel Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1
14.1
14.1
14.1
Cleaning and Care
Washing and Polishing
To protect the finish of your new vehicle, follow these
guidelines carefully:
pitting on the aluminum wheel surfaces caused from
natural environmental contamination, and will make
future cleaning and polishing easier.
1.
Rinse the wheel with high-pressure water to remove any debris, grit, or dirt particles.
2.
Use a 100% cotton cloth dipped in a mild soap
solution to help remove built up dirt and grease.
3.
Rinse the remaining soap residue from the
wheel.
4.
Dry the wheel thoroughly with a 100% cotton
cloth.
5.
Use metal cleaner/polish that is compatible with
aluminum to remove spots and stains from the
surfaces of the wheel as necessary.
6.
Apply carnauba wax to the visible wheel surfaces. Carnauba wax should be reapplied on a
regular basis to maintain the wheel luster.
• During the first 30 days, rinse your vehicle fre-
quently with water. If the vehicle is dirty, use a
mild liquid soap. Do not use detergent.
• During the first 30 days, do not use anything
abrasive on your vehicle. Brushes, chemicals,
and cleaners may scratch the finish.
• During the first 120 days, do not wax your
vehicle.
To extend the life of your vehicle’s finish, follow these
guidelines:
• Avoid washing your vehicle in the hot sun. Al-
ways use water. After the vehicle is completely
washed, dry it with a towel or chamois.
• Do not dust painted surfaces with a dry cloth,
as this will scratch the paint.
• Do not remove ice or snow from a painted sur-
face with a scraper of any sort.
• To prevent damage to the finish, wax it regu-
larly. If the finish has become dull, before waxing, remove oxidized paint using a cleaner specifically designed for this purpose. Remove all
road tar and tree sap before waxing. Freightliner recommends that a quality brand of
cleaner or cleaner-polish and polishing wax be
used.
• Do not let diesel fuel or antifreeze stand on a
painted surface. If either should occur, rinse
the surface off with water.
• To prevent corrosion, have any nicks or other
damage on the finish touched up as soon as
possible.
• Park your vehicle in a sheltered area whenever
possible.
Wheel Cleaning
Accuride® Machined and Polished
Aluminum Wheels
Regular cleaning of Accuride machined or polished
aluminum wheels is recommended to keep the wheel
finish bright and shiny. The use of an aluminum
wheel polish or carnauba wax will protect the polished wheel surfaces, will help prevent corrosion and
14.1
Care of Chrome Parts
To prevent rust, keep chrome parts clean and protected at all times. This is especially important during
winter driving and in coastal areas where there is
exposure to salt air.
When cleaning chrome parts, use clean water and a
soft cloth or sponge. A mild detergent may also be
used.
Sponge gently, then rinse. If necessary, use a nonabrasive chrome cleaner to remove stubborn rust or
other material. Do not use steel wool.
To help protect the chrome after cleaning, apply a
coat of polishing wax to the surface. Never use wax
on parts that are exposed to high heat, such as exhaust pipes.
Dashboard and Instrument
Panel Care
NOTICE
When cleaning the dashboard, instrument panel,
or gauge lens covers, do not use Armor-All Protectant®, STP Son-of-a-Gun®, window cleaner, or
other equivalent treatments. These cleaners contain vinyl plasticizers which can cause stress
crazing in the interior plastic panels and can result in cracking of the panels. Some cleaners can
also have an adverse effect on the clear plastic
Cleaning and Care
of instrument panels and gauge lens covers, resulting in a foggy or cloudy appearance. This
type of damage is not covered by vehicle warranty.
To clean the dashboard, instrument panel, and gauge
lens covers, use a cloth dampened with warm soapy
water. Make certain to wring the cloth out well before
cleaning, as excess water will damage the electrical
components.
14.2
15
In an Emergency
Freightliner Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Starting With Jumper Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running Out of Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.3
15.3
In an Emergency
Freightliner Help
In the event of a vehicle emergency, call the Customer Assistance Center at 1–800–385–4357 or
1–800–FTL–HELP. Call night or day, weekdays or
weekends, for dealer referral, vehicle information, or
breakdown coordination.
Hazard Warning Lights
Pull out the hazard warning light switch on the steering column to activate the hazard warning lights.
When the hazard warning light switch is pulled out,
all of the turn signal lights and both of the turn signal
indicator lights on the instrument panel will flash. To
cancel the warning lights, push the switch in.
2.
NOTICE
Always connect the batteries and jumper cables
correctly (positive-to-positive and negative-tonegative). Connecting a charging device backwards (positive-to-negative) can severely damage
the vehicle electrical content and cause nonwarrantable failures.
3.
Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the
positive terminal on the discharged battery. See
Fig. 15.1.
4.
Connect the other end of the positive jumper
cable to the positive terminal on the booster battery providing the charge.
Towing
See Chapter 16 for towing information.
Emergency Starting With
Jumper Cables
When using jumper cables, follow the instructions
below.
WARNING
Batteries release explosive gas. Do not smoke
when working around batteries. Put out all flames
and remove all sources of sparks or intense heat
in the vicinity of the battery. Do not allow the vehicles to touch each other. Do not lean over the
batteries when making connections, and keep all
other persons away from the batteries. Failure to
follow these precautions could lead to severe
personal injury as a result of an explosion or
acid burns.
NOTICE
Make sure that both starting systems are the
same voltage. Electronic devices on both vehicles can be damaged when connected to a vehicle with a different operating voltage.
1.
Apply the parking brakes and turn off all lights
and other electrical devices.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to jump start a
damaged battery.
15.1
Open the battery door (location will vary) to access the batteries. Slide the battery tray out.
WARNING
Do the next step exactly as instructed and do not
allow the clamps of one cable to touch the
clamps of the other cable. Otherwise, a spark
could occur near a battery, possibly resulting in
severe personal injury from explosion or acid
burns.
5.
Connect the negative (-) jumper cable to the
negative terminal on the booster battery.
6.
Connect the other end of the negative jumper
cable to the negative ground stud on the vehicle
requiring the jump start.
7.
Start the engine of the vehicle providing the jump
start and let the engine run for a few minutes to
charge the batteries of the other vehicle.
NOTICE
Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time during any of the following procedures. Wait two minutes after each try to allow
the starter to cool. Failure to do so could cause
starter damage.
8.
Attempt to start the engine of the vehicle with the
batteries receiving the charge.
9.
When the engine starts, let it idle for a few minutes.
In an Emergency
4
D
B
3
E
2
+
−
−
+
+
−
−
+
−
+
C
−
+
1
A
01/07/2011
f545725
Disconnect jumper cables in the REVERSE order that they were connected.
A.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Discharged Battery
C. Positive Jumper Cable
E. Booster Battery
Negative Ground Stud
D. Negative Jumper Cable
1st Connection: Positive Jumper Cable to Discharged Battery
2nd Connection: Positive Jumper Cable to Booster Battery
3rd Connection: Negative Jumper Cable to Booster Battery
4th Connection: Negative Jumper Cable to Negative Ground Stud (discharged battery)
Fig. 15.1, Jumper Connections (three battery system shown for clarity)
WARNING
Do the next step exactly as instructed and do not
allow the clamps of one cable to touch the
clamps of the other cable. Otherwise, a spark
could occur near a battery, possibly resulting in
severe personal injury from explosion or acid
burns.
10. Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the
11. Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the
booster battery.
12. Disconnect the positive cable from the booster
battery.
13. Disconnect the other end of the positive jumper
cable from the jump started vehicle.
14. Slide the battery tray back into position and close
the battery door.
negative cable stud on the jump started vehicle.
15.2
In an Emergency
Changing a Flat Tire
DANGER
When working on the vehicle, shut down the engine, set the parking brake, and chock the tires.
Before working under the vehicle, always place
jack stands under the frame rails to ensure the
vehicle can not drop. Failure to follow these
steps could result in serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING
Wheel lug nut torque is very high and the
wheel/tire assemblies are very heavy. Changing a
tire could result in back injury. If possible, call a
qualified service facility to change a flat tire.
IMPORTANT: If a flat tire occurs while driving,
gradually decrease vehicle speed. Holding the
steering wheel firmly, move the vehicle to a safe
location as quickly as possible.
1.
If possible, stop the vehicle on a level surface,
away from traffic.
2.
Set the parking brake and turn the ignition switch
to the OFF position.
3.
Turn on the hazard warning lights.
4.
Remove the spare wheel, jack, jack handle, and
lug wrench from storage, if so equipped.
5.
Use a block to chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being changed.
WARNING
This vehicle is very heavy. Jacking this vehicle
should be done with extreme caution. The vehicle
could slip, causing personal injury or death.
NOTE: The jacking point for the front and rear
wheels is directly under the axle. See Fig. 15.2
and Fig. 15.3 for correct jack placement.
6.
Place the jack on a solid surface. Insert the jack
handle and pump the handle to slightly raise the
vehicle. Do not raise the wheel off of the ground.
Loosen the wheel lug nuts, but do not remove
them.
7.
Raise the vehicle until the wheel is off of the
ground. Remove the lug nuts and the wheel.
15.3
8.
Install the spare wheel and the lug nuts. Make
sure that the beveled sides of the nuts face inward.
9.
In a star pattern, tighten the nuts evenly until
snug.
10. Lower the vehicle until the wheel touches the
ground. Tighten the wheel nuts to the correct
torque specifications in the proper tightening sequences. See Group 40 of the Recreational Vehicle Chassis Maintenance Manual for instructions.
11. Finish lowering the vehicle to the ground, then
remove the jack.
12. Remove the wheel chock (the block), then stow
the jack, jack handle, and lug wrench.
13. After operating the vehicle for 50 to 100 miles
(80 to 161 km), retighten the nuts. Tighten the
wheel nuts to the correct torque specifications in
the proper tightening sequences. See Group 40
of the Recreational Vehicle Chassis Maintenance
Manual for instructions.
Running Out of Fuel
WARNING
Diesel fuel is flammable. When you approach a
vehicle and the smell of diesel fuel is present,
immediately shut off all engines and ignition
sources. Avoid causing sparks and stay away
from arcing switches and equipment. Extinguish
cigarettes, pilot lights, flames, or other sources
of ignition in the area and adjacent areas. Immediately provide extra ventilation to the area. Do
not start the vehicle or any other type of equipment until the fuel leak is corrected and the area
cleared of fuel. Failure to perform these actions
could lead to the ignition of the fuel, which could
cause personal injury or death, or severe property damage.
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, try to stop the vehicle
on a level location away from traffic. Add at least 2
gallons (8 liters) of fuel to the fuel tank in order to
restart the engine. If the vehicle is not level, up to 6
gallons (22 liters) of fuel may be required. Prolonged
engine cranking may be required to pump fuel from
the fuel tank to the engine before the engine will
start.
In an Emergency
11/10/2009
1
2
1. Proper Jack Placement Location(s)
1
f330259
2. Incorrect Jack Placement Location
Fig. 15.2, Jack Placement for ZF IFS
NOTICE
Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time. Wait two minutes after each try to
allow the starter to cool. Failure to do so could
cause starter damage.
If the vehicle will not start by cranking the engine, the
fuel system may need to be primed. See the applicable engine manufacturer’s operation and maintenance manual.
15.4
In an Emergency
1
1
1
1
1
2
07/30/2014
f321182a
1. Incorrect Jack Placement
2. Correct Jack Placement
Fig. 15.3, Jack Placement for V-Ride
15.5
16
Towing
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Towing With the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
Towing
Towing the Vehicle
IMPORTANT: When it is necessary to tow the
vehicle, follow the instructions below closely to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
3
On vehicles equipped with an independent front
suspension, do not tow the vehicle by the suspension assembly. Components of the suspension can be damaged.
When towing or pushing any vehicle equipped
with an Allison transmission, disconnect the
driveshaft at the rear axle and support it as necessary, regardless of the distance or speed
traveled.
Removing the Transmission from the
Park (P) Position
If a vehicle with a shift-by-wire (SBW) system needs
to be towed and the system cannot be activated to
take the transmission out of Park (P), follow the
steps in the procedure below.
1
2
f270124
05/16/2003
1. SBW Actuator
2. Access Hole Plug
3. Shift Selector Shaft (part of Allison transmission)
Fig. 16.1, SBW Actuator (at transmission)
NOTICE
1.
Set the parking brake on the tow vehicle.
2.
Chock the tires of the tow vehicle.
3.
Set the parking brake on the disabled vehicle.
4.
Chock the tires of the disabled vehicle.
5.
Underneath the disabled vehicle, at the transmission, remove the access hole plug at the rear of
the SBW actuator. See Fig. 16.1.
6.
Insert a 3/16-inch allen wrench or hex key
through the access hole into the rear of the actuator. Turn the allen wrench in a clockwise direction until the transmission comes out of the
Park (P) position.
Due to the many variables that exist in towing,
positioning the lifting and towing device is the
sole responsibility of the tow vehicle operator.
The operator must be familiar with standard towing industry safety measures. Improper procedures could result in personal injury or death.
7.
Replace the access hole plug.
3.
Attach the towing device.
8.
Remove the chocks from the tires of both vehicles.
4.
Lift the vehicle and secure the safety towing
chains. If additional clearance is needed, remove
the front wheels.
5.
Connect the clearance lights, taillights, and signal lights. Connect any special towing lights required by local regulations.
NOTE: The transmission may also be placed in
the Park (P) position using this procedure.
Front Towing Hookup
1.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2.
If the vehicle is to be lifted and towed, remove
the driveshaft.
16.1
Failure to remove the driveshaft when towing the
vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground could
result in damage to the transmission and other
parts.
WARNING
WARNING
Before releasing the parking brakes, make the
connection to the towing vehicle or chock the
tires on the disabled vehicle. Failure to do so
Towing
could result in hazardous conditions because the
vehicle could suddenly roll and injury could
occur.
6.
Towing With the Vehicle
WARNING
Release the parking brake.
NOTICE
Before attempting to tow a vehicle with air suspension (and during the towing operation), ensure that the air suspension is properly aired. Air
the suspension through the Schrader valve on
the air dryer. Attempting to tow a vehicle with an
improperly aired suspension may result in damage to the chassis and body.
Rear Towing Hookup
1.
Position the front tires so that they point straight
ahead and secure the steering wheel in this position.
2.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING
Due to the many variables that exist in towing,
positioning the lifting and towing device is the
sole responsibility of the tow vehicle operator.
The operator must be familiar with standard towing industry safety measures. Improper procedures could result in personal injury or death.
3.
Attach the towing device.
4.
Lift the vehicle and secure the safety towing
chains. If additional clearance is needed, remove
the bumper extension, if so equipped.
5.
Connect the clearance lights, taillights, and signal lights. Also connect any special towing lights
required by local regulations.
Freightliner neither recommends nor approves
connecting a trailer or other towed vehicle’s
braking system directly to the vehicle braking
system. Freightliner also neither recommends
nor approves tapping into the vehicle air brake
system, nor operating a towed vehicle or trailer’s
braking system by means of the vehicle braking
system. Failure to observe this warning could
result in severe injury or death, or substantial
property damage.
The towing vehicle’s brake system is rated for
operation at the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) and does not include the towed weight.
Separate functional brake systems and chocks
must be used for safe control and parking of
towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than
1500 lbs (681 kg).
Do not tow unbraked vehicles if the combined
weight of both vehicles is more than the sum of
the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of the
towing vehicle. Otherwise brake capacity will be
inadequate, which could result in personal injury
or death.
General Information
IMPORTANT: An auxiliary braking system is
strongly recommended when towing. Follow
your state’s motor vehicle regulations and the
body builder’s recommendations to determine if
an auxiliary system is required for towing.
1.
Never load the vehicle over the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). Considerable damage to
the drivetrain may result if the vehicle is over its
GVWR. Check the GVWR safety compliance certification label (provided by the final manufacturer) to find the GVWR.
2.
Use the Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
and Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) to determine
the towing capacity. Refer to the final manufacturer for GCWR. If the GCWR is exceeded, serious damage to the drivetrain and brake system
may result. Loading past the GCWR may lead to
unsafe operating and braking conditions.
3.
Subtract the GVW (which is the actual weight of
the vehicle alone) from the GCWR (which is the
NOTICE
Before attempting to tow a vehicle with air suspension (and during the towing operation), ensure that the air suspension is properly aired. Air
the suspension through the Schrader valve on
the air dryer. Attempting to tow a vehicle with an
improperly aired suspension may result in damage to the chassis and body.
16.2
Towing
total weight this vehicle can safely pull) to determine the acceptable weight this vehicle can tow.
4.
Make sure that the towing equipment is properly
and safely attached to your vehicle.
5.
When descending a steep grade, shift the transmission into the next lower gear or use the exhaust brake to provide additional engine braking.
NOTE: In a high-altitude operating environment,
your engine will lose power at the rate of 1 percent per 1000 feet (305 meters) of elevation.
For these high-altitude operating conditions, a
reduction in gross vehicle weights and gross
combination weights is recommended and will
result in improved vehicle performance.
6.
To avoid vehicle damage and handling difficulty,
evenly distribute the trailer load. Always tie the
load down securely.
7-Pin Connector
The following information lists the amperage (amp)
load limits for each of the connections in the 7-pin
connector. See Fig. 16.2 for an example of the 7-pin
connector.
• Electric Brakes (to brake the system) — A 12
gauge wire interfaces with the 7-pin connector
trailer tow plug. See the brake manual for
exact specifications.
• RH Stop/Turn — 20 amp
• Back Up Lamps — 10 amp
• LH Stop/Turn — 20 amp
• Running Lamps — 20 amp
• Ignition [+] (to charge the tow vehicle batteries)
— 40 amp
• Ground [–] — for all
Hitches
Use a hitch and ball recommended by your vehicle
manufacturer or your dealer, and make sure that its
location is compatible with that of the trailer. Use a
good weight-carrying hitch that uniformly distributes
the trailer tongue loads through the bumper and the
frame. Do not exceed the recommended towing capacity of the vehicle.
ELECTRIC BRAKES
RH STOP/TURN
BACKUP LAMPS
LH STOP/TURN
RUNNING LAMPS
02/02/2005
f544573
Fig. 16.2, 7-Pin Connector
NOTICE
Always disconnect the battery and the engine
electronic control module (ECM) before welding
anything to the chassis frame.
Do not use single-clamp bumper hitches or
hitches that attach to the vehicle axle. However,
multi-clamp bumper hitches for occasional use of
a rental trailer are acceptable if properly attached. Follow the towing instructions of a reputable rental agency. Never attach safety chains to
the bumper.
Whenever a trailer hitch is removed, be sure to have
all mounting holes in the underbody properly sealed
to prevent possible entry of exhaust fumes, dirt, or
water.
Hitch Rating
A standard hitch has two ratings depending on the
mode of operation; see Table 16.1.
• Weight Carrying—Requires a draw bar and
hitch ball. The draw bar supports all of the vertical tongue load of the trailer.
• Weight Distributing—Requires an aftermarket
weight distributing system, consisting of a draw
bar, hitch ball, spring bars, and snap-up
brackets. The vertical tongue load of the trailer
is distributed between the truck and the trailer
by this system.
IMPORTANT: The towing vehicle’s brake system
is rated for operation at the GVWR and does
16.3
Towing
not include the towed weight. Separate functional brake systems and wheel chocks must be
used for safe driving control and parking of
towed vehicles or trailers weighing more than
1500 lbs (681 kg).
The maximum vehicle weight rating and towing
capacities are based on the powertrain and
chassis equipment options specified on your
vehicle. Table 16.1 defines the maximum vehicle and trailer weight ratings according to the
vehicle transmission options. The actual vehicle
weight and towing capacities of your vehicle
may be less due to the chassis and OEM equipment combinations specified by the final stage
manufacturer (body builder). Refer to the manufacturer’s certification labels for actual vehicle
weight ratings.
Trailers
WARNING
Always use safety chains between the vehicle
and the trailer. Failure to do so could cause personal injury or death if the hitch fails.
IMPORTANT: Before connecting a trailer lighting
system directly to the lighting system of the vehicle, see your dealer or rental trailer agency for
the correct type of wiring and relays for your
trailer and for heavy-duty flashers.
WARNING
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified
on the certification label. Table 16.1 lists the
maximum GVWR and GAWR for recreational vehicle chassis. Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds
the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage, structural damage, or loss of vehicle control. Failure to observe
this warning could result in severe injury or
death, or substantial property damage.
Parking With A Trailer
Park the vehicle on a flat surface. Chock the tires as
follows:
1.
Select Neutral (N) on the gear shift selector while
depressing the service brake.
2.
Continue depressing the service brake and have
another person place wheel chocks under the
trailer wheels.
3.
Once the wheel chocks are in place, release the
service brake, making sure that the chocks are
holding the vehicle and trailer.
4.
Apply the park brake.
5.
Depending on the series of transmission, select
either Neutral (N) or Park (P) on the gear shift
selector.
Trailer Towing Tips
Towing a trailer significantly alters the manner in
which the towing vehicle performs.
• Before starting on a trip, practice turning, stop-
ping, and backing in an area away from heavy
traffic to gain experience in handling the extra
weight and length of the trailer. Take enough
time to learn the "feel" of the vehicle/trailer
combination before starting out on a trip. Make
certain you know what clearance is required for
the trailer roof.
• Skillful backing requires practice. Back very
slowly, with someone outside at the rear of the
trailer to guide your efforts. Place your hand at
the bottom of the steering wheel and move it in
the direction you want the rear of the trailer to
swing. Make small corrections instead of exaggerated ones. A slight movement of the steering wheel will result in a much larger movement of the rear of the trailer.
16.4
Towing
Chassis
Model
Allison
Transmission
Trailer Weight Ratings*
Maximum
Maximum
GVWR lbs (kg) GCWR lbs (kg)
1000 MH
22,000 (9988)
26,000 (11 804)
2100 MH
26,000 (11 804)
30,000 (13 620)
2200 MH
26,000 (11 804)
26,000 (11 804)
2350 MH
30,000 (13 620)
30,000 (13 620)
2500 MH
33,000 (14 982)
33,000 (14 982)
2550 MH
30,000 (13 620)
30,000 (13 620)
3000 MH
*
*
4000 MH
*
*
XC, MC
XC
Hitch Type
Weight Carrying
Weight Distributing
Weight Carrying
Weight Distributing
Weight Carrying
Weight Distributing
Weight Carrying
Weight Distributing
Weight Carrying
Weight Distributing
Weight Carrying
Weight Distributing
Weight Carrying
Weight Distributing
Weight Carrying
Weight Distributing
Maximum Gross
Trailer Weight lbs (kg)
10,000 (4540)
12,000 (5448)
10,000 (4540)
12,000 (5448)
10,000 (4540)
12,000 (5448)
10,000 (4540)
12,000 (5448)
10,000 (4540)
12,000 (5448)
10,000 (4540)
12,000 (5448)
15,000 (6810)
16,000 (7264)
15,000 (6810)
16,000 (7264)
* Values shown are the maximum for each model. Actual vehicle weight and tow ratings may be less, depending on the chassis and body manufacturer’s
equipment options. Refer to the manufacturer’s certification labels for the actual vehicle weight ratings.
Table 16.1, Trailer Weight Ratings
• Allow considerably more room for stopping
when the trailer is attached. If you have a
manual brake controller, "lead" with the trailer
brakes (if so equipped) when approaching a
stop, if possible. Trailer brakes are also handy
for correcting trailer side-sway. Just touch them
for a moment without using your vehicle brakes
and the trailer should settle down and track
steadily again.
• To assist in attaining good handling of the ve-
hicle trailer combination, it is important that the
trailer tongue load be maintained at approximately 10 to 15 percent of the loaded trailer
weight.
• Check everything before starting out on the
road. After you have traveled about 50 miles
(80 km), stop in a protected location and
double-check your trailer hitch and electrical
connections for security. Also, examine the
trailer wheel lug nuts for tightness.
• Because trailer wheels will be closer than the
towing vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn,
drive slightly beyond the normal turning point
to avoid obstructions.
• Allow extra distance for passing other vehicles.
Downshift to a lower gear for better acceleration, if necessary. Use caution when passing,
16.5
as the added weight of the trailer can dramatically decrease the acceleration of the towing
vehicle.
• Ahead of the vehicle, allow at least the equiva-
lent of one vehicle and trailer length combined
for each 10 mph (16 km/h) of speed.
• If your vehicle begins to lose speed as you
climb a hill, downshift to a lower gear for more
power at the rear wheels.
• Before descending a steep grade, slow down
and shift to a lower gear. Driving with the
transmission in a lower gear will assist in reducing downhill speed. If the trailer should
begin to sway, touch the trailer brakes (if so
equipped), not the vehicle brakes, and the
trailer should settle down.
• When possible, do not park on a grade with a
trailer. However, when this is necessary, apply
the service brakes and hold while someone
else places chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
To start out when parked on a grade, apply the
service brake pedal and with the vehicle either
in Neutral (N) or Park (P), start the engine.
Shift the transmission into gear and release the
parking brake. Then release the brake pedal
and move the vehicle uphill to free the chocks.
Towing
Apply the brake pedal while another person
retrieves the chocks.
16.6
17
Vehicle Storage
Preparation for Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Removal from Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Vehicle Storage
Preparation for Storage
When storing your recreational vehicle for an extended period of time (60 days or more), the following steps should be taken to give it maximum protection. Note the date and mileage on the vehicle when
it is placed in storage.
• Fill the fuel tank and add a high-quality fuel
stabilizer to the fuel. Never store the vehicle
with a partially full tank of fuel.
• Change the engine oil and filter. Used oil does
not provide adequate protection.
• The cooling system was originally protected
with antifreeze to –34°F (–37°C). If colder temperatures are expected, adjust the mixture. If
the coolant has been in the vehicle for five
years or 100,000 miles (160 900 km), flush the
cooling system and fill it with an appropriate
mixture of antifreeze and water, making sure
that the coolant contains a rust inhibitor.
• If it has been more than 18 months or 24,000
miles (38 616 km) since the transmission was
serviced, change the transmission fluid and
filter.
• Service the fuel filters.
• Run the engine until it is fully warmed up.
• Operate the air conditioning.
• If possible, store the vehicle in a dry, well ven-
tilated area, protected from sunlight.
• Check the tires for damage and set the tire
pressure to maximum as indicated on the sidewall of the tire. Clean the tires using a mild
soap that would be used to clean the vehicle.
• If possible, raise the vehicle onto safety
stands. Do not store the vehicle on hydraulic
leveling jacks. Hydraulic jacks will bleed pressure over time, lowering the coach back onto
the tires.
• Cover the tires to protect them from heat and
sunlight.
• If possible, release the parking brake.
• Remove and clean the battery. Always discon-
nect the negative cable first, then the positive
cable. Store the battery in a cool, dry place
and keep it charged.
• Lubricate all grease fittings on the chassis and
drivetrain.
17.1
• Cover all engine and transmission openings
with moisture-resistant tape.
Removal from Storage
Follow these steps when the recreational vehicle is
removed from storage.
• Remove the covers from the tires and thor-
oughly inspect the tires for damage. Inflate
them to the correct pressure for the actual
weight on the tires. Consult the Michelin or
Goodyear manual included with your chassis
for correct tire pressure. Weigh the vehicle if
you do not know how much it weighs.
• Check for fluid leaks. Repair as necessary.
• Check the engine oil level. Add oil if needed.
• Check the coolant level in the reservoir and
radiator. Add coolant if needed.
• Check the hydraulic fluid level in the reservoir.
Add fluid if needed.
• Check the engine belts for wear, damage, or
cracking.
• Check the engine fan for damage.
• Check the fuel/water separator. If it is empty,
prime the fuel system. For priming instructions,
see the Cummins Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
• Check the engine compartment for nesting ani-
mals. Check for leaks and damage to the
hoses and wiring.
• Check the rear axle lubricant level.
• Lubricate all grease fittings on the chassis and
drivetrain.
• Check the charge level of the battery. Clean
the ends of the battery cables. If the batteries
need to be replaced, install a clean and fully
charged battery. Always connect the positive
cable first, then connect the negative cable.
Coat the battery terminals and connectors with
a dielectric protectant sealant.
• If the vehicle was stored on safety stands,
lower the vehicle at this time and set the parking brake.
• Turn the ignition to the RUN position. Verify
that the fuel gauge and voltmeter are working
correctly.
Vehicle Storage
• Run the engine until it is warm, then check
again for fluid leaks.
• Check the transmission fluid level using the
cold check method in the Allison Operator’s
Manual.
• Check all exterior lights and replace as neces-
sary.
17.2
18
Specifications
Torque Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conversion Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Service Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse/Relay/Circuit Breaker Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.1
18.4
18.5
18.6
18.7
Specifications
Torque Charts
Torque Values for U.S. Customary Thread Fasteners With Lubricated* or Plated Threads†
Regular Hex
Flanged
Thread
Grade 5
Grade 5 or Grade 8 or Grade 8 or
Grade 5
Grade B
Grade 8 or
Grade G
Diameter—
Bolt
B Nut
8.2 Bolt
C Nut
Bolt
Nut
8.2 Bolt
Nut
Pitch
Torque: lbf·ft (N·m)
Torque: lbf·ft (N·m)
Torque: lbf·ft (N·m)
Torque: lbf·ft (N·m)
f230002
1/4–20
1/4–28
5/16–18
5/16–24
3/8–16
3/8–24
7/16–14
7/16–20
1/2–13
1/2–20
9/16–12
9/16–18
5/8–11
5/8–18
3/4–10
3/4–16
7/8–9
7/8–14
1–8
1–12
1–14
7 (9)
8 (11)
15 (20)
16 (22)
26 (35)
30 (41)
42 (57)
47 (64)
64 (87)
72 (98)
92 (125)
103 (140)
128 (173)
145 (197)
226 (306)
253 (343)
365 (495)
402 (545)
—
—
—
f230003
f230004
8 (11)
9 (12)
16 (22)
17 (23)
28 (38)
32 (43)
45 (61)
50 (68)
68 (92)
77 (104)
98 (133)
110 (149)
136 (184)
154 (209)
241 (327)
269 (365)
388 (526)
427 (579)
582 (789)
637 (863)
652 (884)
f230005
f230006
6 (8)
7 (9)
13 (18)
14 (19)
23 (31)
25 (34)
35 (47)
40 (54)
55 (75)
65 (88)
80 (108)
90 (122)
110 (149)
130 (176)
200 (271)
220 (298)
320 (434)
350 (475)
—
—
—
f230007
f230008
f230009
10 (14)
12 (16)
21 (28)
23 (31)
37 (50)
42 (57)
60 (81)
66 (89)
91 (123)
102 (138)
130 (176)
146 (198)
180 (244)
204 (277)
320 (434)
357 (484)
515 (698)
568 (770)
—
—
—
* Freightliner recommends that all plated and unplated fasteners be coated with oil before installation.
† Use these torque values if either the bolt or nut is lubricated or plated (zinc-phosphate conversion-coated, cadmium-plated, or waxed, Geomet 321XL
coated, or waxed).
Table 18.1, Torque Values for U.S. Customary Thread Fasteners With Lubricated or Plated Threads
18.1
Specifications
Torque Values for U.S. Customary Thread Fasteners With Dry (Unlubricated)* Plain (Unplated) Threads†
Regular Hex
Flanged
Thread
Grade 5 or B
Grade 8 or 8.2 Grade 8 or C
Grade 8 or 8.2
Diameter—
Grade 5 Bolt
Grade G Nut
Nut
Bolt
Nut
Bolt
Pitch
Torque: lbf·ft (N·m)
Torque: lbf·ft (N·m)
Torque: lbf·ft (N·m)
f230002
1/4–20
1/4–28
5/16–18
5/16–24
3/8–16
3/8–24
7/16–14
7/16–20
1/2–13
1/2–20
9/16–12
9/16–18
5/8–11
5/8–18
3/4–10
3/4–16
7/8–9
7/8–14
1–8
1–12
1–14
f230003
8 (11)
9 (12)
15 (20)
17 (23)
28 (38)
31 (42)
45 (61)
50 (68)
70 (95)
75 (102)
100 (136)
110 (149)
135 (183)
155 (210)
240 (325)
270 (366)
385 (522)
425 (576)
580 (786)
635 (861)
650 (881)
f230004
10 (14)
12 (16)
22 (30)
25 (34)
40 (54)
45 (61)
65 (88)
70 (95)
95 (129)
110 (149)
140 (190)
155 (210)
190 (258)
215 (292)
340 (461)
380 (515)
540 (732)
600 (813)
820 (1112)
900 (1220)
915 (1241)
f230005
f230008
f230009
—
—
22 (30)
—
40 (54)
—
65 (88)
—
95 (129)
—
140 (190)
—
190 (258)
—
340 (461)
—
—
—
—
—
—
* Threads may have residual oil, but will be dry to the touch.
† Male and female threads (bolt and nut) must both be unlubricated and unplated. If either is plated or lubricated, use Table 18.3. Freightliner recommends
that all plated and unplated fasteners be coated with oil before installation.
Table 18.2, Torque Values for U.S. Customary Thread Fasteners With Dry (Unlubricated) Plain (Unplated) Threads
18.2
Specifications
Torque Values for Metric Thread Fasteners With Lubricated* or Plated Threads†
Thread
Class 8.8 Bolt
Class 8 Nut
Class 10.9 Bolt Class 10 Nut
Diameter—
Torque: lbf·ft (N·m)
Torque: lbf·ft (N·m)
Pitch
8.8
M6
M8
M8 x 1
M10
M10 x 1.25
M12
M12 x 1.5
M14
M14 x 1.5
M16
M16 x 1.5
M18
M18 x 1.5
M20
M20 x 1.5
M22
M22 x 1.5
M24
M24 x 2
M27
M27 x 2
M30
M30 x 2
10.9
8
f230010
f230011
5 (7)
12 (16)
13 (18)
24 (33)
27 (37)
42 (57)
43 (58)
66 (89)
72 (98)
103 (140)
110 (149)
147 (199)
165 (224)
208 (282)
213 (313)
283 (384)
315 (427)
360 (488)
392 (531)
527 (715)
569 (771)
715 (969)
792 (1074)
10
f230012
f230013
7 (9)
17 (23)
18 (24)
34 (46)
38 (52)
60 (81)
62 (84)
95 (129)
103 (140)
148 (201)
157 (213)
203 (275)
229 (310)
288 (390)
320 (434)
392 (531)
431 (584)
498 (675)
542 (735)
729 (988)
788 (1068)
990 (1342)
1096 (1486)
* Freightliner recommends that all plated and unplated fasteners be coated with oil before installation.
† Use these torque values if either the bolt or nut is lubricated or plated (zinc-phosphate conversion-coated,
cadmium-plated, or waxed, Geomet 321XL coated, or waxed).
Table 18.3, Torque Values for Metric Thread Fasteners With Lubricated or Plated
Threads
18.3
Specifications
Conversion Charts
When You Know U.S.
Customary
Length
inches (in)
inches (in)
feet (ft)
yards (yd)
miles (mi)
Area
square inches (in2)
square inches (in2)
square feet (ft2)
Volume
cubic inches (in3)
cubic inches (in3)
cubic inches (in3)
fluid ounces (fl oz)
pints (pt)
quarts (qt)
gallons (gal)
cubic feet (ft3)
cubic feet (ft3)
Weight/Force
ounces (av) (oz)
pounds (av) (lb)
U.S. tons (t)
U.S. tons (t)
Torque/Work Force
inch–pounds (lbf·in)
foot–pounds (lbf·ft)
Pressure/Vacuum
inches of mercury (inHg)
pounds per square inch (psi)
Multiply
By
To Get Metric
When You
Know Metric
Multiply
By
To Get U.S. Customary
25.4
2.54
0.3048
0.9144
1.609
millimeters (mm)
centimeters (cm)
meters (m)
meters (m)
kilometers (km)
0.03937
0.3937
3.281
1.094
0.6215
inches (in)
inches (in)
feet (ft)
yards (yd)
miles (mi)
645.16
6.452
0.0929
square millimeters (mm2)
square centimeters (cm2)
square meters (m2)
0.00155
0.155
10.764
square inches (in2)
square inches (in2)
square feet (ft2)
16387.0
16.387
0.01639
29.54
0.47318
0.94635
3.7854
28.317
0.02832
cubic millimeter (mm3)
cubic centimeters (cm3)
liters (L)
milliliters (mL)
liters (L)
liters (L)
liters (L)
liters (L)
cubic meters (m3)
0.000061
0.06102
61.024
0.03381
2.1134
1.0567
0.2642
0.03531
35.315
cubic inches (in3)
cubic inches (in3)
cubic inches (in3)
fluid ounces (fl oz)
pints (pt)
quarts (qt)
gallons (gal)
cubic feet (ft3)
cubic feet (ft3)
28.35
0.454
907.18
0.90718
grams (g)
kilograms (kg)
kilograms (kg)
metric tons (t)
0.03527
2.205
0.001102
1.1023
ounces (av) (oz)
pounds (av) (lb)
U.S. tons (t)
U.S. tons (t)
11.298
1.3558
Newton–centimeters (N·cm)
Newton–meters (N·m)
0.08851
0.7376
inch–pounds (lbf·in)
foot–pounds (lbf·ft)
3.37685
6.895
kilo Pascals (kPa)
kilo Pascals (kPa)
0.29613
0.14503
inches of mercury (inHg)
pounds per square inch (psi)
Table 18.4, Metric/U.S. Customary Conversion
When You Know
Subtract
degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
32
Then
Divide By
1.8
When You
Know
degrees Celsius (°C)
To Get
Multiply
By
1.8
Then
Add
32
To Get
degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
Table 18.5, Temperature Conversion
18.4
Specifications
Fluids and Lubricants
In the engine cooling system use 50 percent water
and 50 percent corrosion-inhibiting antifreeze to protect the engine to –34°F (–37°C) year round.
Coolant Capacities*
Engine Make
Coolant Volume: qt (L)
12 (11)
Cummins
* The total coolant volume is dependent on the number and location of optional passenger heaters.
Table 18.6, Coolant Capacities
Approved Coolants
Refer to the engine manufacturer’s service literature for approved coolant.
Table 18.7, Approved Coolants
TES-295 Approval Number
AN-051005
AN-011001
AN-031002
AN-031003
AN-031004
AN-071006
Approved Allison Transmission Lubricants*
Company
ExxonMobil Lubricants and Petroleum Specialties Company
Castrol Heavy Duty Lubricants
BP
Cognis Corporation
International Truck & Engine Company
John Deere & Company
Product Brand Name
Mobil Delvac Synthetic ATF
TranSynd
Autran Syn 295
Emgard 2805
Fleetrite Synthetic ATF
HD SynTran
* To check the latest Allison approved fluids, go to www.allisontransmission.com. Lubricants listed in order of preference. Do not mix types of oil.
Table 18.8, Approved Allison Transmission Lubricants
Allison Transmission Lubricant Capacities
Transmission Model
Fill Capacity:* qt (L)
1000/2000 Series (standard sump)
14.8 (14)
1000/2000 Series (shallow sump)
12.7 (12)
2100/2200/2500 Series (shallow sump)
13 (12)
3000 Series (4 inch)
29 (27)
3000 Series (2 inch)
26 (25)
* Quantities listed are approximate. Add the recommended amount of fluid as listed under fill capacity. Do not overfill.
Table 18.9, Allison Transmission Lubricant Capacities
18.5
Specifications
Approved Driveline Lubricants
Lubricant and
Lubricant Brands
Specification
Phillips Petroleum Philube MW–
EP2 Grease
Exxon 5160
Universal joint, slip
Amalie All Purpose Grease with
joint, and spline
Moly–L1–2M
grease must meet
Shell Super Duty Special FF
ArvinMeritor
Specification O–634–B Marathon Maralube Molycode
529
(NLGI Grade No. 2,
Lithium 12-Hydroxy
Shell Moly Poly Grease
Stearate with
Kendall L424 Grease
Molybdenum Disulfide)
Amoco Super Chassis Grease
Ford Specification M1C–75B or
part number C1AZ 19590
Electric Service Center
The information under this heading is to help familiarize the driver with the basic electrical system. Servicing the electrical system should be done only by
qualified technicians. Special skills and equipment
are required. Take your vehicle to an authorized
Freightliner service facility for repairs. The Recreational Vehicle chassis uses multiple electrical components (and fuel and hydraulic filters). Each component is mounted in varying locations on the chassis.
If equipped with an Arens service center, it is
mounted in one specific location, and that mounting
location will vary. See Fig. 18.1. See Table 18.14,
Table 18.15, and Table 18.16 for connector
information.
Table 18.10, Approved Driveline Lubricants
1
2
3
Approved Power Steering Fluids
Approved Fluid*
Fluid Type*
Dexron® III or equivalent
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Dexron® II
* Fill the power steering reservoir only with approved clean fluid. Do not
mix fluid types. Wear eye protection when changing the fluid and filter.
Table 18.11, Approved Power Steering Fluids
Freightliner Drive Axle Lubricant Capacity
Differential/Hubs
Capacity: qt (L)
Differential Only
5.8 (5.5)
Differential and Hubs
7.4 (7.0)
Table 18.12, Freightliner Drive Axle Lubricant
Capacity
Meritor Drive Axle Lubricant Capacity
Axle Model
Capacity: pt (L)*
RS-15-120
16 (7.6)
RS-17-145
33.6 (15.9)
RS-19-145
34.4 (16.3)
RS-21-145
32 (15.1)
RS-23-160
42 (19.9)
RS-23-165
42 (19.9)
* Quantities listed are approximate and include 1 pint (0.5 L) for each
wheel end and with the drive pinion at 3 degrees.
Table 18.13, Meritor Drive Axle Lubricant Capacity
4
5
6
07/05/2007
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Connector
Connector
Connector
Connector
Connector
Connector
f545107
4,
4,
4,
3,
1,
2,
Power Input A
Power Input B
Power Input C
8 Positions
16 Positions
12 Positions
Fig. 18.1, Arens Controls
Connector 1
Connector Position
Description
1A
ECU-IGN
18.6
Specifications
Connector 1
Connector Position
Description
1B
FAN-SIG
1C
FAN NO
1D
EXTRA
1E
ECM BATT
1F
SPARE
1G
SPARE NC
1H
DIAG PWR
1J
FAN NC
1K
FAN RTN
1L
MBE ECM BATT
1M
HYD FAN MOD
1N
SPARE COM
1P
IGN
1R
SPARE NO
1S
SPARE SIG
Table 18.14, Connector 1
Fuse/Relay/Circuit Breaker
Identification
Circuit breakers protect against circuit overload. If a
circuit becomes overloaded (usually caused by a
short to ground), the circuit breaker opens, stopping
current flow. The vehicle may be equipped with autoreset breakers.
Fuse/Relay/Circuit Breaker
Identification (front-engine diesel
chassis)
The electrical system has five separate power distribution modules (PDMs) containing both fuses and
relays. An optional tow power PDM is also available.
See Fig. 18.2 and Fig. 18.3. The PDMs are mounted
in two places:
• Two inside the cab area, typically at the base
of the steering column.
Connector 2
Connector Position
Description
2A
IGN SW START
2B
TCM BATT
2C
TCM BATT
2D
L TURN SIG
2E
REV LPS SIG
2F
REV LPS OUT
2G
GND
2H
START OUT
2J
NEU START SIG
2K
TCM
2L
MARKER SIG
2M
R TURN SIG
Table 18.15, Connector 2
Connector 3
Connector Position
Description
3A
REV TOW
3B
EXTRA
3C
EXTRA
3D
EXTRA
3E
R TURN OUT
3F
MARKER OUT
3G
L TURN OUT
3H
IGN OUT TOW
Table 18.16, Connector 3
18.7
• Three outside, typically mounted to the right of
the operator’s station.
Fuse/Relay/Circuit Breaker
Identification
The electrical system has a box that contains both
fuses and relays. The box is mounted in varying locations (typically in the cab under the dash) depending on the design of the chassis. The fuses and relay
boxes shown vary depending on chassis options.
See Fig. 18.4, Fig. 18.5, Fig. 18.6, and Fig. 18.7.
Specifications
07/05/2007
Ref. Dia.: 24−01514
f545105
Fig. 18.2, Cab PDMs (inside cab)
07/05/2007
Ref. Dia.: 24−01565
f545106
Fig. 18.3, Chassis and Optional Tow Power PDMs
(chassis mounted)
18.8
Specifications
Ref. Dia.: 24−01483
07/06/2007
Fig. 18.4, Fuse/Relay (typical install)
18.9
f545104
Specifications
Ref. Dia.: 24−01483
07/06/2007
f545108
Fig. 18.5, Fuse/Relay (typical install)
18.10
Specifications
Ref. Dia.: 24−01483
07/06/2007
Fig. 18.6, Fuse/Relay (typical install)
18.11
f545109
Specifications
Ref. Dia.: 24−01483
07/06/2007
f545110
Fig. 18.7, Fuse/Relay (typical install)
18.12
Index
Subject
Page
Subject
Page
A
D
Air Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Automatic Slack Adjusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Brake Burnishing (new
vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Allison Automatic Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17
1000/2100/2200/2350 MH
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17
2100/2500 Models (Arens
SBW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
2500/3000/4000 MH Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Ametek Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Message Display Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Priority Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Antilock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Meritor WABCO® ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Daily Pretrip Inspection and
Maintenance Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Daily Pretrip Inspection and
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Dashboard and Instrument
Panel Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Driving Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
B
Braking Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
Parking Brake Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
C
Care of Chrome Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3
Collision Warning System,
Eaton VORAD VS-400 (Stand
Alone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
Driver Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
Failure Display Mode/Fault
Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
Forward-Looking-Radar
(FLR) Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
Menu Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
Side Sensor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
Special Road Situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
Component Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Conversion Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.4
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
SmartWheel-Mounted Cruise
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
Turn Signal-Mounted Cruise
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
I-1
E
Electric Service Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.6
Electrical System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Battery Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Emergency Starting With
Jumper Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Emissions Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Aftertreatment System
Indicators Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Vehicle Emission Control
Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Engine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
Cold-Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
High-Altitude Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
Engine Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Cold-Weather Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Starting After Extended
Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
Exhaust Aftertreatment System
(ATS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.10
DEF Warnings and Engine
Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15
Diesel Exhaust Fluid and
Tank, EPA10 and Newer
Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
EPA07 Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
EPA10 and Newer Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Fuel/DEF Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15
Exhaust Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
F
Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freightliner Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse/Relay/Circuit Breaker
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse/Relay/Circuit Breaker
Identification (front-engine
diesel chassis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.5
15.1
18.7
18.7
Index
Subject
Page
Fuse/Relay/Circuit Breaker
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.7
G
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
Air Intake Restriction Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Pressure/Temperature
Gauges (Four-in-One
Gauge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
H
Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Horn Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
Hydraulic Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.19
Auto-Apply Parking Brake
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.20
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.19
Meritor WABCO® Antilock
Braking System (ABS),
Hydraulic Brake Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.19
I
Ignition Switch and Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrumentation Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dash Message Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode/Reset Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Warning and
Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer and
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning and Indicator
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1
11.1
11.1
11.7
11.1
11.3
11.3
11.8
11.6
11.6
11.4
L
Lightbar Control Unit (LBCU)
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audible Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight Interrupt
(SmartWheel only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight, Panel Light, and
Fog Light Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subject
Page
High-Beam Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Marker Lamp Interrupt
(SmartWheel only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
M
Monthly Post-Trip Inspection
and Maintenance Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3
Monthly Post-Trip Inspection
and Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.13
O
Optional Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turbo Boost Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OptiView™ Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audible Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8
5.8
5.8
5.8
4.1
4.1
4.2
4.1
4.2
P
Power Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Powertrain Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
Allison Automatic
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
Tag-Axle Suspension Dump
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
Preparation for Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Pretrip and Post-Trip General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
R
Removal from Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Running Out of Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.3
6.1
6.3
6.2
6.1
S
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Speedometer and Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Tachometer (Three-in-One
Gauge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
Steering Column Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
TRW Tilt/Telescope Steering
Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
I-2
Index
Subject
Page
TRW® ColumnDrive
Adjustment Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
T
Torque Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Towing Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Towing Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Transmission
from the Park (P) Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing With the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-Pin Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.1
16.1
16.1
16.2
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.2
16.3
16.4
15.1
V
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
W
Warning and Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ABS Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto-Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Engine Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dash Driver Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel Particulate Filter
(DPF) Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Brake Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fasten Seat Belt Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Lamp Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight High-Beam
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Coolant Temperature
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Exhaust System
Temperature (HEST) Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Brake System
Warning (Ametek only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left-Turn Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Air Pressure Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Battery Voltage Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Fuel Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Oil Pressure Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-3
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.3
5.3
5.3
5.4
5.4
5.4
5.4
5.4
5.4
5.4
5.4
5.4
5.4
Subject
Page
Low Windshield Washer
Fluid Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
Maintenance Warning
(Ametek only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Parking Brake On Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Right-Turn Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Shift Inhibit Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Steerable Tag Axle Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Stop Engine Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Transmission Overheat
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Transmission Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Wait to Start Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Water In Fuel Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Washing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Weekly Post-Trip Inspection
and Maintenance Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3
Weekly Post-Trip Inspection
and Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.12
Wheel Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Accuride® Machined and
Polished Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Windshield Wiper Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
SmartWheel Wiper Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Standard Wiper Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising